Apex Standards 3GPP Meeting Tracker

Apex Standards 3GPP Meeting Tracker is a tool that provides a matrix for comparing company viewpoints and positions on topics within an agenda item. It automatically populates the matrix with summaries of TDoc contributions, giving readers a clear and comprehensive overview of each company's position. This valuable insight allows chairmen to identify companies with similar positions and suggest merging topics early on, leading to more efficient and productive meetings. Delegates can use it to observe differences and common grounds, which can be used as a basis for future discussions. Based on the observation, 3GPP meeting delegates or back-office followers can access TDoc contributions by simply clicking on them to view the actual contents, making it easy to zoom in and out as a he or she explores the degree of relevance of a particular company's position over a topic.

We value your feedback! Please don't hesitate to contact us at support@apexstandards.com with any questions!

References:
1. Apex Standards Web
2. Apex Standards GPT
3. Apex Standards 3GPP TDoc Analysis Platform
4. Apex Standards TS/TR Section Essentiality Analysis Platform
5. Apex Standards TDoc-CR-TS-SEP Historical Construction


A complete list of all 3GPP WG meeting summaries during the same meeting cycle staring on Monday, April 17, 2023:
R1-112-bis-e    R2-121-bis-e    R3-119-bis-e    R4-106-bis-e
S2-156-e    S3-110-AdHoc-e    S4-123-e    S5-148-e    S6-54-e
C1-141-e    C3-127-e    C4-115-e






Company Position Alignments and Differences Overview for 3GPP-R2-121-bis-e

updated as of Mon, Apr 17, 2023, 09:15 PM UTC (4 hours ago)
Mon, Apr 17, 02:15 PM California
Mon, Apr 17, 11:15 PM Berlin/Paris
Tue, Apr 18, 05:15 AM Beijing








3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 2.1 : Approval of the agenda
Entity Concept 1: RAN2#121bis-e Concept 2: 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Concept 3: Meeting #121-bis Concept 4: Electronic Meeting Concept 5: Decision Power Concept 6: CR Decision Coordination Concept 7: Agenda Concept 8: RAN WG2 Chairman
MediaTek Hosting RAN2#121bis-e (R2-2302400) Member, TSG-RAN WG2 Organizing Meeting #121-bis Conducting Electronic Meeting Full Decision Power (R2-2302400) CR Coordination between bis-meetings & ordinary meetings Providing Agenda (R2-2302400) RAN2 Chairman (R2-2302400)










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 2.2 : Approval of the report of the previous meeting
I am unable to create an actual HTML table here, but I can provide you with the information and structure you can use to create the table on your own. Here's the table structure with the identified entities and technical concepts:
Entity Technical Concept 1 Technical Concept 2 Technical Concept 3 Technical Concept 4 Technical Concept 5 Technical Concept 6 Technical Concept 7 Technical Concept 8
3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting report [R2-2302401] RAN2#121 [R2-2302401] Agenda Item 2.2 [R2-2302401] ETSI MCC source [R2-2302401] Meeting in Athens, Greece [R2-2302401] 27 February - 3 March, 2023 [R2-2302401] Document for approval [R2-2302401]
ETSI Postal address and support office address [R2-2302401]
Entity names: 1. 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 2. ETSI Technical concepts: 1. Meeting report 2. RAN2#121 3. Agenda Item 2.2 4. ETSI MCC source 5. Meeting in Athens, Greece 6. 27 February - 3 March, 2023 7. Document for approval 8. Postal address and support office address









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 2.4 : Instructions
Entity RAN WG2 Terms of Reference Work Items RAN WG2 Meetings Email and Offline Discussions Web Conference (e-meeting) Documents Change Requests
MCC Scope, objectives, organization (R2-2302402) Identification, status, coordination (R2-2302402) Preparation, server, WLAN, post-meeting tasks (R2-2302402) Email reflector, identification, AT-meeting, post-meeting (R2-2302402) Tohru, GoToWebinar, etiquette, hybrid meetings (R2-2302402) Technical Specifications, Reports, version numbering (R2-2302402) Overview, categories, guidelines, CR cover sheet (R2-2302402)










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 2.5 : Others

Entity Names and Technical Concepts

Entity Concept 1 Concept 2 Concept 3 Concept 4 Concept 5 Concept 6 Concept 7 Concept 8
Ericsson RAN1 RRC Parameter Preparation (R2-2303634) 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 #121bis-e Tdoc Electronic meeting Apr 17th – 26th, 2023 Agenda Item: 2.5 (Others) Document for: Information, Discussion










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 4.1 : EUTRA corrections Rel-17 and earlier
Entity Timers UE Actions RRC_INACTIVE State MAC Reset RLC Entities Access Barring QoE Configuration
Google [Ref R2-2303818] Except T302, T309, T320, T325, T330 Entering RRC_INACTIVE [5.3.8.7] UE actions upon entering Reset MAC, release default MAC configuration Re-establish RLC entities for all SRBs and DRBs Applicable for all access categories except '0' and '2' Correction on QoE configuration release
Google Inc. [Ref R2-2303821] Except T302, T309, T320, T323, T325, T330 Entering RRC_INACTIVE [5.3.8.7] UE actions upon entering Reset MAC, release default MAC configuration Re-establish RLC entities for all SRBs and DRBs Applicable for all access categories except '0' and '2' Correction on QoE configuration release
Google [Ref R2-2303822] Except T302, T309, T320, T323, T325, T330 Entering RRC_INACTIVE [5.3.8.7] UE actions upon entering Reset MAC, release default MAC configuration Re-establish RLC entities for all SRBs and DRBs Applicable for all access categories except '0' and '2' Correction on QoE configuration release










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 4.2 : NB-IoT and eMTC support for NTN Rel-17
Entity Indication of GSO-NGSO cell type SystemInformationBlockType1 UE access Scheduling of system information
Qualcomm Incorporated [Ref R2-2303040] Proposes indication of GSO-NGSO cell type in SIB1 Contains information relevant for UE access evaluation and system info scheduling [Ref R2-2303040] UE allowed access based on SIB1 info [Ref R2-2303040] Defines scheduling of other system information [Ref R2-2303040]










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 4.2.1 : General and Stage 2 corrections
Entity Names IoT-NTN UE Capabilities Emergency Calls in IoT NTN Timing Advance and Frequency Pre-compensation Kmac Definition Scheduling Timing
RAN3 LS on UE capability signalling for IoT-NTN (R3-230951), Rel 17, LTE_NBIOT_eMTC_NTN, contact: Vodafone [Ref R2-2302422]
MediaTek Inc Stage-2 Corrections for Supporting Emergency Calls in IoT NTN [Ref R2-2302677] UE shall update Timing Advance and frequency pre-compensation, no GNSS acquisition [Ref R2-2302677]
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips Clarification on Kmac definition, discussion and decision [Ref R2-2303665]
Ericsson Correction for R17 IoT NTN, DL and UL frame alignment, uplink time synchronization reference point (RP) [Ref R2-2303832]










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 4.2.2 : UP corrections
Concept OPPO [Ref R2-2302530] Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [Ref R2-2303980]
1. IoT NTN TDD support, MAC correction, 3GPP Release 17 [R2-2302530] Validity timer expiry, MAC procedure correction [R2-2303980]
2. Radio Access Network Affected by proposed change [R2-2302530] -
3. Core Network Affected by proposed change [R2-2302530] -
4. Random Access procedure - Subclause 5.1 modification [R2-2303980]
5. PREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER - Set for BL UE, enhanced coverage, NB-IoT UE [R2-2303980]
6. MSG3_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER - Set for FDD, TDD, enhanced coverage levels [R2-2303980]
7. Preamble transmission - Physical layer instruction, repetitions, PRACH, RA-RNTI, subcarrier index [R2-2303980]
8. Enhanced coverage levels - Level 0, 1, PowerRampingParameters-NB-v1450, powerRampingStepCE1, preambleInitialReceivedTargetPowerCE1 [R2-2303980]










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 4.2.3 : CP corrections
Entity GNSS-ValidityDuration (R2-2302676) NPRACH Preamble Descriptions (R2-2303194) User Consent for Location Info in RLF-Report (R2-2303667) UE Location Information in NB-IoT RLF Report (R2-2303961) CR on T317 and T318 (R2-2303981) CR on T317 and T318 (R2-2304082) Reporting Location in NB-IoT RLF Report (R2-2304136)
MediaTek Inc. Remaining GNSS validity duration in UE, s10: 10 seconds, s20: 20 seconds (R2-2302676)
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell Alignment of NPRACH preamble descriptions with RAN1 specification for IoT-NTN parameters (R2-2303194)
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips User consent required for location info in RLF report for NB-IoT (R2-2303667)
Huawei, HiSilicon Analysis of UE location info in NB-IoT RLF report, postpone discussion (R2-2303961) UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED or RRC_INACTIVE, reset MAC, stop/start timer T302 (R2-2303981) UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED or RRC_INACTIVE, reset MAC, stop/start timer T302 (R2-2304082)
Samsung R&D Institute UK Adapt LTE IoT specifications to work over Non-Terrestrial networks, report location in NB-IoT RLF (R2-2304136)


TDoc comparison: R2-2303667 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303961 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304136 (Samsung R&D Institute UK)

Technical Differences:

1. QCI1 indication in Radio Link Failure Report
- If the UE supports QCI1 indication in Radio Link Failure Report and has a DRB for which QCI is 1, the drb-EstablishedWithQCI-1 is included.
- Example from TDoc R2-2303667: "except for NB-IoT, if the UE supports QCI1 indication in Radio Link Failure Report and has a DRB for which QCI is 1: include the drb-EstablishedWithQCI-1"

2. NG(EN)-DC Configuration
- If the UE is configured with (NG)EN-DC and T316 is configured and SCG transmission is not suspended and the SCG is not deactivated and neither NR PSCell change nor NR PSCell addition is ongoing, the measurements are based on the time domain measurement resource restriction, if configured.
- Example from TDoc R2-2303667: "if the UE is configured with (NG)EN-DC; and if T316 is configured; and if SCG transmission is not suspended; and if the SCG is not deactivated; and if neither NR PSCell change nor NR PSCell addition is ongoing (i.e. T304 for the NR PSCell is not running as specified in TS 38.331 The measurements are based on the time domain measurement resource restriction, if configured. MDT topic."

3. NB-IoT RLF Report
- For NB-IoT, set the connectionFailureType to rlf, set the c-RNTI to the C-RNTI used in the PCell, and set the rlf-Cause to the trigger for detecting radio link failure.
- Example from TDoc R2-2303667: "except for NB-IoT, set the connectionFailureType to rlf; except for NB-IoT, set the c-RNTI to the C-RNTI used in the PCell; except for NB-IoT, set the rlf-Cause to the trigger for detecting radio link failure"
- NB-IoT control plan CIoT UE should not include its location information in RLF report, and whether the user plan CIoT UE should report its location information in RLF report depends on whether obtainLocation is configured.
- Example from TDoc R2-2303961: "Proposal 1: RAN2 to confirm that, in NTN, the control plan CIoT UE should not include its location information in RLF report and whether the user plan CIoT UE should report its location information in RLF report depends on whether obtainLocation is configured."

4. Coarse Location Reporting
- Coarse location reporting was not introduced for NB-IoT due to it being applicable only to the UP-solution.
- Example from TDoc R2-2304136: "Observation 2: Coarse location reporting was not introduced for NB-IoT due to that this would only be applicable to the UP-solution."
- Coarse UE location reporting was introduced in NTN for determining the correct cell identifiers that a UE shall be associated with.
- Example from TDoc R2-2304136: "Location reporting in was introduced both in NR NTN and IoT NTN for the purpose of determining the correct cell identifiers that a UE shall be associated with."

Sources:
- TDoc R2-2303667: [82] clause 5.4.3.3
- TDoc R2-2303961: Conclusion
- TDoc R2-2304136: Discussion Location reporting in IoT NTN

TDoc comparison: R2-2303981 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304082 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

Technical differences between TDoc R2-2303981 and TDoc R2-2304082:

1. MeasConfig removal: TDoc R2-2304082 removes measId from measIdList within VarMeasConfig only if the associated measObjectId is associated with condReconfigurationTriggerEUTRA/condReconfigurationTriggerNR, whereas TDoc R2-2303981 removes measId from measIdList within VarMeasConfig for all measIds associated with the current UE configuration in VarMeasConfig. (TDoc R2-2303981, 2> for each measId, that is part of the current UE configuration in VarMeasConfig, if the associated reportConfig has condReconfigurationTriggerEUTRA/condReconfigurationTriggerNR configured...remove the entry with the matching measId from the measIdList within the VarMeasConfig; TDoc R2-2304082, 3> remove the entry with the matching measId from the measIdList within the VarMeasConfig;)

2. UE timers: TDoc R2-2304082 does not mention storing UE 7.3.1 timers, whereas TDoc R2-2303981 does. (TDoc R2-2303981, 2> store the UE 7.3.1 Timers (Informative) ; TDoc R2-2304082 does not have this entry)

3. TDoc numbers: The TDoc numbers are different for the two snippets.

Other technical similarities between the two snippets include:

1. Stopping timers: Both snippets specify stopping all timers that are running except T302, T320, T322, T323, T325, T330, T331. (TDoc R2-2303981, 1> stop all timers that are running except T302, T320, T322, T323, T325, T330, T331; TDoc R2-2304082, 1> stop all timers that are running except T302, T320, T322, T323, T325, T330, T331;)

2. crs-ChEstMPDCCH-ConfigDedicated release: Both snippets specify releasing crs-ChEstMPDCCH-ConfigDedicated, if configured. (TDoc R2-2303981, 1> release crs-ChEstMPDCCH-ConfigDedicated, if configured; TDoc R2-2304082, 1> release crs-ChEstMPDCCH-ConfigDedicated, if configured;)

3. RLC entities: Both snippets specify re-establishing RLC entities for all SRBs and DRBs, including RBs configured with NR PDCP. (TDoc R2-2303981, 2> re-establish RLC entities for all SRBs and DRBs, including RBs configured with NR PDCP; TDoc R2-2304082, 2> re-establish RLC entities for all SRBs and DRBs, including RBs configured with NR PDCP;)

4. VarConditionalReconfiguration removal: Both snippets specify removing all entries within VarConditionalReconfiguration, if any. (TDoc R2-2303981, 2> remove all entries within VarConditionalReconfiguration, if any; TDoc R2-2304082, 2> remove all entries within VarConditionalReconfiguration, if any;)









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 4.4 : Positioning corrections Rel-16 and earlier
Concept Entity - CATT (R2-2302625) Entity - CATT (R2-2302626) Entity - CATT (R2-2302627) Entity - CATT (R2-2302628) Entity - CATT (R2-2302629) Entity - CATT (R2-2302630) Entity - CATT (R2-2302631) Entity - CATT (R2-2302632) Entity - CATT (R2-2302633) Entity - CATT (R2-2302634) Entity - CATT (R2-2302635) Entity - CATT (R2-2302636)
LPP Configuration Point-to-point, location server, target device, position-related measurements, reference sources, R2-2302625 Point-to-point, location server, target device, position-related measurements, reference sources, R2-2302626 Point-to-point, location server, target device, position-related measurements, reference sources, R2-2302627 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Capability Transfer Procedures N/A N/A N/A Transfer capabilities, target device, server, R2-2302628 Transfer capabilities, target device, server, R2-2302629 Transfer capabilities, target device, server, R2-2302630 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Common Positioning - CommonIEsRequestLocationInformation N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Common IEs, Request Location Information LPP message Type, R2-2302631 Common IEs, Request Location Information LPP message Type, R2-2302632 Common IEs, Request Location Information LPP message Type, R2-2302633 N/A N/A N/A
Positioning Assistance Data Transfer N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Transmission of LPP Request Assistance Data, IEs, positioning-method-specific request, R2-2302634 Transmission of LPP Request Assistance Data, IEs, positioning-method-specific request, R2-2302635 Transmission of LPP Request Assistance Data, IEs, positioning-method-specific request, R2-2302636


TDoc comparison: R2-2302634 (CATT) R2-2302635 (CATT) R2-2302636 (CATT)

The technical differences among the three TDocs are:

1. Change in Padding of Ciphering Key Data: TDoc R2-2302634 specifies to pad the bit string with zeroes in the least significant bit positions to achieve 128 bits, denoted D0, if the d0 field contains less than 128-bits. However, TDocs R2-2302635 and R2-2302636 specify to pad out the bit string with zeroes in the most significant bit positions to achieve 128 bits if C0 contains less than 128-bits.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302635: "if C0 contains less than 128-bits: pad out the bit string with zeroes in most significant bit positions to achieve 128 bits."

2. No Ciphering Key Data in First Segment: TDoc R2-2302634 specifies to decode the assistanceDataElement segment and deliver the related assistance data portion together with the assistanceDataSegmentType and assistanceDataSegmentNumber to upper layers if the cipheringKeyData is not included in the first segment. However, TDocs R2-2302635 and R2-2302636 specify to decode the assembled assistance data element and deliver the related assistance data to upper layers.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302635: "else: decode the assembled assistance data element and deliver the related assistance data to upper layers."

3. Padding Only for Ciphering Key Data: TDocs R2-2302634 and R2-2302635 specify to pad the bit string with zeroes only if the cipheringKeyData is included in the first segment and C0 or d0 contains less than 128-bits. However, TDoc R2-2302636 specifies to pad the bit string with zeroes if C0 contains less than 128-bits, irrespective of whether cipheringKeyData is included in the first segment or not.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302636: "if C0 contains less than 128-bits: pad out the bit string with zeroes in most significant bit positions to achieve 128 bits."

Overall, the technical differences among the TDocs mainly relate to the padding of bit strings in specific scenarios and the handling of cipheringKeyData in the first segment.

TDoc comparison: R2-2302631 (CATT) R2-2302632 (CATT) R2-2302633 (CATT)

Technical Differences:

1. TDoc R2-2302631 and TDoc R2-2302632 both define the same ASN.1 structure for AdditionalPathList-r14, maxPaths-r14, and MotionTimeSource-r15.

Example from TDoc R2-2302631:

AdditionalPathList-r14 ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxPaths-r14)) OF AdditionalPath-r14

maxPaths-r14 INTEGER ::= 2

MotionTimeSource-r15 ::= SEQUENCE {

timeSource-r15 ENUMERATED {servingCell, referenceCell, gnss, mixed, other, none, ...}

}

2. TDoc R2-2302631, TDoc R2-2302632, and TDoc R2-2302633 all define the same ASN.1 structure for OTDOA-RequestLocationInformation, which is used by the location server to request OTDOA location measurements from a target device.

Example from TDoc R2-2302631:

-- Next change 6.5.1.6 OTDOA Location Information Request – OTDOA-RequestLocationInformation

The IE OTDOA-RequestLocationInformation is used by the location server to request OTDOA location measurements from a target device.

OPTIONAL, ... }

3. TDoc R2-2302631, TDoc R2-2302632, and TDoc R2-2302633 all define the same ASN.1 structure for Displacement-r15, which includes fields for bearing-r15, bearingUncConfidence-r15, bearingRef-r15, horizontalDistance-r15, and horizontalDistanceUnc-r15.

Example from TDoc R2-2302631:

Displacement-r15 ::= SEQUENCE {

bearing-r15 INTEGER (0..3599),

bearingUncConfidence-r15 INTEGER (0..100) OPTIONAL,

bearingRef-r15 ENUMERATED { geographicNorth, magneticNorth, local },

horizontalDistance-r15 INTEGER (0..8191),

horizontalDistanceUnc-r15 INTEGER (0..255)

-- ASN1START

4. TDoc R2-2302633 defines a new ASN.1 structure for Sensor-MotionInformation-r15, which is not present in the other two TDocs.

Example from TDoc R2-2302633:

Sensor-MotionInformation-r15 ::= QoS ::=

-- OPTIONAL ]] }

AdditionalPathList-r14 ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxPaths-r14)) OF AdditionalPath-r14

maxPaths-r14 INTEGER ::= 2

MotionTimeSource-r15 ::= SEQUENCE {

timeSource-r15 ENUMERATED {servingCell, referenceCell, gnss, mixed, other, none, ...}

}

-- ASN1STOP Next change

Summary:

1. TDoc R2-2302631 and TDoc R2-2302632 define the same ASN.1 structures for AdditionalPathList-r14, maxPaths-r14, and MotionTimeSource-r15.

2. TDoc R2-2302631, TDoc R2-2302632, and TDoc R2-2302633 all define the same ASN.1 structure for OTDOA-RequestLocationInformation.

3. TDoc R2-2302631, TDoc R2-2302632, and TDoc R2-2302633 all define the same ASN.1 structure for Displacement-r15.

4. TDoc R2-2302633 defines a new ASN.1 structure for Sensor-MotionInformation-r15 that is not present in the other two TDocs.

TDoc comparison: R2-2302628 (CATT) R2-2302629 (CATT) R2-2302630 (CATT)

Technical Differences:

1. TDoc R2-2302628, R2-2302629, and R2-2302630 all pertain to procedures related to capability transfer and location information delivery in the context of LPP and positioning methods.
2. The main purpose of the procedures in clause 5.1 is to enable the transfer of capabilities from the target device to the server.
3. The Location Information Delivery procedure in clause 5.3.2 allows the target to provide unsolicited location information to the server.
4. The target may send one or more additional ProvideLocationInformation messages to the server containing additional location information data.
5. Capabilities in this context refer to positioning and protocol capabilities related to LPP and the positioning methods supported by.
6. These procedures instantiate the Capability Transfer transaction from TS 36.305.
7. The target sends a ProvideLocationInformation message to the server to transfer location information.
8. The last message shall include the endTransaction IE set to TRUE.
9. If step 2 does not occur, this message shall set the endTransaction IE to TRUE.
10. The procedure is shown in Figure 5.3.2-1.

Example Snippets from TDoc:

1. "The purpose of the procedures that are grouped together in this clause is to enable the transfer of capabilities from the target device to the server."
2. "The Location Information Delivery allows the target to provide unsolicited location information to the server."
3. "The target may send one or more additional ProvideLocationInformation messages to the server containing additional location information data."
4. "Capabilities in this context refer to positioning and protocol capabilities related to LPP and the positioning methods supported by."
5. "These procedures instantiate the Capability Transfer transaction from TS 36.305."
6. "The target sends a ProvideLocationInformation message to the server to transfer location information."
7. "The last message shall include the endTransaction IE set to TRUE."
8. "If step 2 does not occur, this message shall set the endTransaction IE to TRUE."
9. "The procedure is shown in Figure 5.3.2-1."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302625 (CATT) R2-2302626 (CATT) R2-2302627 (CATT)

- TDoc R2-2302625 and R2-2302626 both specify that procedures and messages apply equally to UE and NB-IoT.
- TDoc R2-2302627 also specifies that procedures and messages apply equally to UE and NB-IoT.
- All three TDocs include Figure 4.1.1-1, which shows the LPP Configuration for Control- and User-Plane Positioning in E-UTRAN or NG-RAN.
- All three TDocs specify the use of sequence numbers for LPP Duplicate Detection.
- All three TDocs state that LPP is used point-to-point between a location server and a target device to position the device using position-related measurements.
- TDoc R2-2302625 specifies that a sender includes a sequence number in all LPP messages sent for a particular location session.
- TDoc R2-2302625 also specifies that a target device can be aware of a location session from information provided at the NAS level for downlink transport of an LPP message.
- TDoc R2-2302626 has the same specifications as R2-2302625.
- TDoc R2-2302627 has the same specifications as R2-2302625 and R2-2302626.









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 5.1.1 : Stage 2 and Organisational
Entity RAN4 (R2-2302437) Huawei (R2-2304108) HiSilicon (R2-2304109) Huawei (R2-2304110)
Technical Concept 1: SRS Antenna Switching Clarification on impact of SRS antenna switching for TDD-FDD band combinations - - -
Technical Concept 2: TDD-FDD Band Combinations LS on clarification on impact of SRS antenna switching for TDD-FDD band combinations - - -
Technical Concept 3: Handover Request Message - Correction to information delivered in Handover Request message Correction to information delivered in Handover Request message Correction to information delivered in Handover Request message
Technical Concept 4: C-Plane Handling - 9.2.3.2 Handover 9.2.3.2.1 C-Plane Handling 9.2.3.2 Handover 9.2.3.2.1 C-Plane Handling 9.2.3.2 Handover 9.2.3.2.1 C-Plane Handling
Technical Concept 5: Intra-NR RAN Handover - Preparation and execution phase of handover without involvement of 5GC Preparation and execution phase of handover without involvement of 5GC Preparation and execution phase of handover without involvement of 5GC
Technical Concept 6: 5GC - Handover procedure performed without involvement of the 5GC Handover procedure performed without involvement of the 5GC Handover procedure performed without involvement of the 5GC
Technical Concept 7: NR_newRAT-Core Release: Rel-15 Work Item: NR_newRAT-Core - - -
Technical Concept 8: 3GPP Liaisons Coordinator Send any reply LS to: 3GPP Liaisons Coordinator - - -










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 5.1.2.1 : MAC
Entity UL Grant Reception DCI Handling UL-SCH Data Transfer Deactivated Configured Grant Random Access Response PDCCH PUSCH Resource MSGA
Samsung [R2-2303854] Received dynamically, Random Access Response, configured semi-persistently by RRC [5.4.1] Clarification on handling [R2-2303854] 5.4 UL-SCH data transfer [5.4] Deactivated configured grant UL Grant reception in Random Access Response UL Grant received dynamically on PDCCH [5.4.1]
Samsung [R2-2303855] Received dynamically, Random Access Response, configured semi-persistently by RRC, associated with PUSCH resource of MSGA [5.4.1] Clarification on handling [R2-2303855] 5.4 UL-SCH data transfer [5.4] Deactivated configured grant UL Grant reception in Random Access Response UL Grant received dynamically on PDCCH [5.4.1] Associated with PUSCH resource of MSGA [5.1.2a] Specified in clause 5.1.2a
Samsung [R2-2303856] Received dynamically, Random Access Response, configured semi-persistently by RRC, associated with PUSCH resource of MSGA [5.4.1] Clarification on handling [R2-2303856] 5.4 UL-SCH data transfer [5.4] Deactivated configured grant UL Grant reception in Random Access Response UL Grant received dynamically on PDCCH [5.4.1] Associated with PUSCH resource of MSGA [5.1.2a] Specified in clause 5.1.2a










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 5.1.3.2 : UE capabilities
Entity Intraband ENDC UE cap (R2-2302727) Handling of SRS Tx switching capability (R2-2303660) Miscellaneous Correction on UE capability (R2-2303877, R2-2303878, R2-2303879) Correction on PDCCH Blind Detection (R2-2303880, R2-2303881) Correction on pusch-RepetitionTypeB capability (R2-2304161, R2-2304162, R2-2304163) Corrections on NR-DC capabilities (R2-2304165, R2-2304166)
Qualcomm Incorporated Summary of email discussion, Intraband ENDC UE cap, Decision, Agenda Item 5.1.3.2, Release 16 Work Items (R2-2302727, R2-2302728)
Ericsson Clarification on unclear aspects, Field description for srs-TxSwitch in 38.306, Different interpretations from chipset vendors (R2-2303660)
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips FeatureSetUplinkPerCC parameters, Phy-Parameters, R15, R16, R17 (R2-2303877, R2-2303878, R2-2303879) CA-ParametersNR, R16, R17 (R2-2303880, R2-2303881)
Huawei, HiSilicon FeatureSetUplink parameters, UE capability information elements – FeatureSets, Pusch-RepetitionTypeB capability (R2-2304161, R2-2304162, R2-2304163, R2-2304164) BandCombinationList parameters, NRDC-Parameters, R16, R17 (R2-2304165, R2-2304166)


TDoc comparison: R2-2303878 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303879 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303880 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303881 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips)

Technical Differences among TDocs:

1. TDoc R2-2303878: This document includes changes made to the FeatureSetUplinkPerCC parameters and the Phy-Parameters in section 4.2.7.8 and 4.2.7.10, respectively.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303878: "START OF CHANGES 4.2.7.8 FeatureSetUplinkPerCC parameters SECOND CHANGE 4.2.7.10 Phy-Parameters"

2. TDoc R2-2303879: This document also includes changes made to the FeatureSetUplinkPerCC parameters and the Phy-Parameters in section 4.2.7.8 and 4.2.7.10, respectively, similar to TDoc R2-2303878.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303879: "START OF CHANGES 4.2.7.8 FeatureSetUplinkPerCC parameters SECOND CHANGE 4.2.7.10 Phy-Parameters"

3. TDoc R2-2303880: This document includes changes made to the CA-ParametersNR in section 4.2.7.4.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303880: "START OF CHANGES 4.2.7.4 CA-ParametersNR"

4. TDoc R2-2303881: This document also includes changes made to the CA-ParametersNR in section 4.2.7.4, similar to TDoc R2-2303880.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303881: "START OF CHANGES 4.2.7.4 CA-ParametersNR"

In summary, all four TDocs include changes made to different parameters in various sections, indicating updates and revisions being made to the overall document. TDoc R2-2303878 and TDoc R2-2303879 share the same changes made to the FeatureSetUplinkPerCC parameters and the Phy-Parameters, while TDoc R2-2303880 and TDoc R2-2303881 have the same change made to the CA-ParametersNR.

TDoc comparison: R2-2304161 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304162 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304165 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304166 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

TDoc R2-2304161 and TDoc R2-2304162:

• The two TDocs appear to be identical and only differ in their document number.
• The modification pertains to section 4.2.7.7, which involves FeatureSetUplink parameters.

Example from TDoc R2-2304161: “4.2.7.7.4 NR OFDM Allowed for FeatureSets 1 and 2: This parameter is of type NR OFDM Allowed specified in 38.331 [6], and indicates whether NR OFDM modulation is allowed for FeatureSets 1 and 2.”

TDoc R2-2304165 and TDoc R2-2304166:

• Both TDocs involve a modification that starts with section 4.2.7.1 and ends with section 4.2.7.12.
• The modification involves BandCombinationList parameters and NRDC-Parameters.

Example from TDoc R2-2304165: “4.2.7.1.3 DL-UL Configuration: This parameter is of type DL-UL Configuration specified in 38.331 [6], and indicates the physical layer configuration for the downlink and uplink channels.”

Example from TDoc R2-2304166: “4.2.7.7.9 FeatureSetDownlink parameters: This parameter is of type FeatureSetDownlink specified in 38.331 [6], and indicates the downlink features supported by UE for each FeatureSet.”

TDoc comparison: R2-2302727 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2302728 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2303660 (Ericsson)

Technical differences highlighted in TDoc R2-2302727:

- Addition of a new UE capability parameter for UL, intraBandENDC-Support-UL, to indicate different combinations of UE capabilities
- Proposal to introduce a UE capability parameter of bitmap format to indicate support for 4 cases individually
- Differentiation of cases using number of band entries and bandwidth class signalling
- New parameter only signalled when UL capability is different from existing parameter, intraBandENDC-Support

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302727: "[2] discussed whether the UE may support only a subset of the cases; e.g. supports case 1 and case 2, but not others."

Technical differences highlighted in TDoc R2-2302728:

- Existing UE capability parameter, intraBandENDC-Support, indicates either UE capability only for DL or common capability for DL and UL
- Support for non-contiguous intra-band EN-DC in DL and contiguous in UL is considered invalid
- No differentiation between DL and UL in existing parameter, considered non-backward compatible
- New parameter, intraBandENDC-Support-UL, with values {non-contiguous, both} introduced
- RAN2's understanding of "both" is that the UE supports both contiguous and non-contiguous intra-band EN-DC for the same band entries

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302728: "Since there is no differentiation between DL and UL in the existing UE capability parameter intraBandENDC-Support, RAN4’s solution was considered non-backward compatible."

Technical differences highlighted in TDoc R2-2303660:

- Definition of group of impacted UL and DL bands for srs-TxSwitch parameter
- Bands with UL that impact each other define a group
- First-listed band entry number in the group used as identifier
- All band entries in the group signal the same group identifier in txSwitchWithAnotherBand

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303660: "Bands with UL that impact each other define a group (i.e. SRS TX switching on any of the cells will impact UL on all the cells in the group)."

TDoc comparison: R2-2304163 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304164 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

Technical differences between TDoc R2-2304163 and TDoc R2-2304164:

1. The ENUMERATED values for fourPortsPartialCoherent-r16 are different:
- TDoc R2-2304163: {g0, g1, g2, g3, g4, g5, g6}
- TDoc R2-2304164: {g0, g1, g2, g3}

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304164:
- fourPortsPartialCoherent-r16 ENUMERATED{g0, g1, g2, g3} OPTIONAL } OPTIONAL }

2. The UL cancelation scheme for cross-carrier is only supported in TDoc R2-2304163:
- TDoc R2-2304163: cross-carrier ul-CancellationCrossCarrier-r16 ENUMERATED {supported} OPTIONAL
- TDoc R2-2304164: N/A

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304163:
- UL cancelation scheme for cross-carrier ul-CancellationCrossCarrier-r16 ENUMERATED {supported} OPTIONAL

3. The ENUMERATED values for fourPortsNonCoherent-r16 are different:
- TDoc R2-2304163: {g0, g1, g2, g3}
- TDoc R2-2304164: {g0, g1, g2, g3, g4, g5, g6}

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304164:
- fourPortsNonCoherent-r16 ENUMERATED{g0, g1, g2, g3} OPTIONAL

4. The TPMI group for Mode 2 is a SEQUENCE in TDoc R2-2304163, but not in TDoc R2-2304164:
- TDoc R2-2304163: TPMI group for Mode 2 ul-FullPwrMode2-TPMIGroup-r16 SEQUENCE { twoPorts-r16 BIT STRING(SIZE(2)) OPTIONAL, fourPortsNonCoherent-r16 ENUMERATED{g0, g1, g2, g3} OPTIONAL,
- TDoc R2-2304164: N/A

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304163:
- TPMI group for Mode 2 ul-FullPwrMode2-TPMIGroup-r16 SEQUENCE { twoPorts-r16 BIT STRING(SIZE(2)) OPTIONAL, fourPortsNonCoherent-r16 ENUMERATED{g0, g1, g2, g3} OPTIONAL}

5. The supported featureSetsUplinkPerCC list is identified differently:
- TDoc R2-2304163: FeatureSetUplinkPerCC-Id = 4 identifies the 4th element in the featureSetsUplinkPerCC list.
- TDoc R2-2304164: N/A

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304163:
- For example, the FeatureSetUplinkPerCC-Id = 4 identifies the 4th element in the featureSetsUplinkPerCC list.









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 5.2 : NR V2X
Entity PSFCH Configured Power SL CG Clear SL-MaxTransPower Sidelink Info Elements: SL-ResourcePool PSFCH Reception MAC Reset Measurement Event Triggering Criteria
RAN1 (R2-2302415) Reply LS to RAN4 on PSFCH configured power with multiple resource pools (R1-2302231)
OPPO (R2-2302574) Left issue on SL CG clear during MAC-reset
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell (R2-2302799) Correction to sl-MaxTransPower SL-BWP-Config for UE specific NR sidelink communication on one sidelink bandwidth part
CATT (R2-2303157, R2-2303158) Correction on PSFCH configured power for NR sidelink SL-ResourcePool config info for NR sidelink communication resource pool
Xiaomi (R2-2303210, R2-2303211, R2-2303212) Discussion on clear of SL CG upon MAC reset Correction on PSFCH reception for NR sidelink
Huawei, HiSilicon (R2-2303632, R2-2303633, R2-2304144, R2-2304145) TS 38.331 correction on carrier frequency for SL-RSRP measurement
LG Electronics France (R2-2303742) Summary on MAC user plane corrections for NR V2X
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips (R2-2303906, R2-2303909) SL-ResourcePool config info for NR sidelink communication resource pool
vivo (R2-2303912, R2-2303913) Clarification on sl-MaxTransPower
ASUSTeK, Huawei, HiSilicon, Samsung, vivo (R2-2303915, R2-2303928) Corrections on MAC reset regarding configured sidelink grant
Sharp Corporation (R2-2304078) Correction for Measurement Event Triggering Criteria
Huawei, HiSilicon (R2-2304148) Summary on control plan corrections for NR V2X


TDoc comparison: R2-2302574 (OPPO) R2-2302799 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303157 (CATT) R2-2303210 (Xiaomi) R2-2303211 (Xiaomi) R2-2303212 (Xiaomi)

• TDoc R2-2302574: Clarifies the use of mode-2 with exceptional pool during T304 running period. It also discusses the clearing of downlink and uplink assignments in certain scenarios.

• TDoc R2-2302799: Introduces the SL-PBPS-CPS-Config information element and its various parameters, including sl-AllowedResourceSelectionConfig-r17, sl-MinNumCandidateSlotsPeriodic-r17, and sl-BWP-List-r16.

• TDoc R2-2303157: Defines the SL-MinMaxMCS-Config-r16 and SL-BetaOffsets-r16 parameters, which include sl-MCS-Table-r16, sl-MinMCS-PSSCH-r16, sl-MaxMCS-PSSCH-r16, and frequencyShift7p5khzSL-r16. It also introduces the SL-ResourcePool IE and its parameters.

• TDoc R2-2303210: Discusses the need for specifying the release of SL grants during MAC reset, as well as the use of configured SL grants during RLF or HO failure.

• TDoc R2-2303211: Defines the PSFCH reception procedure and its various parameters, including Sidelink HARQ entity, PSSCH transmission, PC5-RRC connection, and HARQ feedback.

• TDoc R2-2303212: Discusses the handling of MAC PDUs during PSCCH and PSSCH transmission, including the use of dynamic sidelink grant and configured sidelink grant, and the signaling of positive or negative acknowledgements on the PUCCH.

Example snippets from the original TDocs:

• From TDoc R2-2302574: "during T304 running period, mode-2 with exceptional pool would be used instead"

• From TDoc R2-2302799: "sl-AllowedResourceSelectionConfig-r17 ENUMERATED {c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, c6, c7}"

• From TDoc R2-2303157: "sl-MinMaxMCS-Config-r16 ::= SEQUENCE { sl-MCS-Table-r16 ENUMERATED {qam64, qam256, qam64LowSE}"

• From TDoc R2-2303210: "no need to clearly specify in MAC to release the configured SL grant when MAC is reset"

• From TDoc R2-2303211: "perform the HARQ-Based Sidelink RLF Detection procedure"

• From TDoc R2-2303212: "instruct the physical layer to signal a positive acknowledgement corresponding to the transmission on the PUCCH"

TDoc comparison: R2-2303632 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303633 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304144 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304145 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

Technical Differences among TDocs R2-2303632, R2-2303633, R2-2304144 and R2-2304145:

1. No significant technical differences were found among the TDocs.
2. All TDocs define the SL-MeasObjectInfo-r16 as a SEQUENCE consisting of sl-MeasObjectId-r16 and sl-MeasObject-r16.
3. The sl-MeasObjectId-r16 is defined as an INTEGER within the range of 1 to maxNrofSL-ObjectId-r16.
4. The sl-MeasObject-r16 is defined as an SL-MeasObjectList information element.
5. The SL-MeasObjectList-r16 is defined as a SEQUENCE of frequencyInfoSL-r16 and other related parameters.
6. The frequencyInfoSL-r16 is defined as an ARFCN-ValueNR.

Example Snippets from TDoc R2-2303632:

1. SL-MeasObjectInfo-r16 ::= SEQUENCE { sl-MeasObjectId-r16 SL-MeasObjectId-r16, sl-MeasObject-r16 SL-MeasObject-r16, ... }
2. SL-MeasObjectId-r16 ::= INTEGER (1..maxNrofSL-ObjectId-r16)
3. SL-MeasObject-r16 ::= SL-MeasObjectList information element
4. SL-MeasObjectList-r16 ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSL-ObjectId-r16)) SEQUENCE { frequencyInfoSL-r16 ARFCN-ValueNR, ... }

Example Snippets from TDoc R2-2303633:

1. SL-MeasObjectInfo-r16 ::= SEQUENCE { sl-MeasObjectId-r16 SL-MeasObjectId-r16, sl-MeasObject-r16 SL-MeasObject-r16, ... }
2. SL-MeasObjectId-r16 ::= INTEGER (1..maxNrofSL-ObjectId-r16)
3. SL-MeasObject-r16 ::= SL-MeasObjectList information element
4. SL-MeasObjectList-r16 ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSL-ObjectId-r16)) SEQUENCE { frequencyInfoSL-r16 ARFCN-ValueNR, ... }

Example Snippets from TDoc R2-2304144:

1. SL-MeasObjectInfo-r16 ::= SEQUENCE { sl-MeasObjectId-r16 SL-MeasObjectId-r16, sl-MeasObject-r16 SL-MeasObject-r16, ... }
2. SL-MeasObjectId-r16 ::= INTEGER (1..maxNrofSL-ObjectId-r16)
3. SL-MeasObject-r16 ::= SL-MeasObjectList information element
4. SL-MeasObjectList-r16 ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSL-ObjectId-r16)) SEQUENCE { frequencyInfoSL-r16 ARFCN-ValueNR, ... }

Example Snippets from TDoc R2-2304145:

1. SL-MeasObjectInfo-r16 ::= SEQUENCE { sl-MeasObjectId-r16 SL-MeasObjectId-r16, sl-MeasObject-r16 SL-MeasObject-r16, ... }
2. SL-MeasObjectId-r16 ::= INTEGER (1..maxNrofSL-ObjectId-r16)
3. SL-MeasObject-r16 ::= SL-MeasObjectList information element
4. SL-MeasObjectList-r16 ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSL-ObjectId-r16)) SEQUENCE { frequencyInfoSL-r16 ARFCN-ValueNR, ... }

TDoc comparison: R2-2303742 (LG Electronics France) R2-2303915 (ASUSTeK, Huawei, HiSilicon, Samsung, vivo) R2-2303928 (ASUSTeK, Huawei, HiSilicon, Samsung, vivo) R2-2304148 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

1. Proposal for offline discussion of CRs listed in Table 1 for MAC spec
- Example: "Discuss the CRs listed in Table 1 offline, the agreed changes for MAC spec could be merged into Rapporteur’s correction CR."

2. Corrections and proposals for MAC user plane corrections for NR V2X
- Example: "The following corrections and proposals could be discussed together. The contributions submitted to AI 5.2 are summarized, Rapporteur’s recommendations are as follows."

3. Procedure for MAC entity reset for PC5-RRC connection
- Example: "If a Sidelink specific reset of the MAC entity is requested for a PC5-RRC connection by upper layers, the MAC entity shall..."

4. Procedure for MAC entity reset due to SCG deactivation
- Example: "If a reset of the MAC entity is requested by upper layers or the reset of the MAC entity is triggered due to SCG deactivation as defined in clause 5.29, the MAC entity shall..."

5. Changes related to sl-MaxTransPower
- Example: "Change related to sl-MaxTransPower R2-2302799 proposes changes on the FD of sl-MaxTransPower according to RAN1 LS [11], as below."

6. Changes related to carrier frequency for SL-RSRP measurement
- Example: "R2-2304144/ R2-2304145 propose below change due to one FFS issue in RAN5 spec related to carrier frequency for SL-RSRP measurement, as well as the missing FD of frequencyInfoSL."

7. Correction for Measurement Event Triggering Criteria
- Example: "R2-2304078 proposes correction for Measurement Event Triggering Criteria as:"

Overall, the TDoc highlights various technical differences related to corrections and proposals for MAC spec, including procedures for MAC entity reset, changes related to sl-MaxTransPower and carrier frequency for SL-RSRP measurement, and corrections for Measurement Event Triggering Criteria. The examples provided in the TDoc showcase specific proposals and changes to be discussed and implemented.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303158 (CATT) R2-2303906 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303909 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2304078 (Sharp Corporation)

Technical differences among the four TDocs are:

1. TDoc R2-2303158 specifies the configuration information for NR sidelink communication resource pool, whereas the other three TDocs do not mention it.
Example: "The IE SL-ResourcePool specifies the configuration information for NR sidelink communication resource pool."

2. TDoc R2-2304078 introduces a new information element, ReportConfigNR-SL, which specifies criteria for triggering a CBR measurement reporting event for NR sidelink communication. The other three TDocs do not include this IE.
Example: "The IE ReportConfigNR-SL specifies criteria for triggering of a CBR measurement reporting event for NR sidelink communication."

3. TDoc R2-2303906 and R2-2303909 are identical, including the same content and meeting name. However, they have different TDoc numbers and meeting dates.
Example: "The IE SL-ResourcePool specifies the configuration information for NR sidelink communication resource pool."

4. All TDocs define the same sequence, SL-MinMaxMCS-Config-r16, which specifies the minimum and maximum modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for NR sidelink communication, but TDoc R2-2303909 and R2-2304078 do not provide any additional information about it.
Example: "SL-MinMaxMCS-Config-r16 ::= SEQUENCE { sl-MCS-Table-r16 ENUMERATED {qam64, qam256, qam64LowSE}, sl-MinMCS-PSSCH-r16 INTEGER (0..27), sl-MaxMCS-PSSCH-r16 INTEGER (0..31) }"

5. All TDocs define the same integer, SL-BetaOffsets-r16, which specifies the beta offset value for NR sidelink communication, but TDoc R2-2303909 and R2-2304078 do not provide any additional information about it.
Example: "SL-BetaOffsets-r16 ::= INTEGER (0..31)"









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 5.3.1 : General and Stage 2 corrections
Entity Yaw and APC GNSS PCO and PCV Error Analysis SSR Orbit and Clock Correction Reference for BDS LS on SSR Orbit and Clock Correction
Swift Navigation, Ericsson (Ref R2-2303030) Clarifications needed for handling Yaw, APC, and associated parameters; RAN2#121 agreements N/A N/A N/A
u-blox AG (Ref R2-2303658) Clarifications needed for handling Yaw, APC, and associated parameters; RAN2#121 agreements Error analysis of GNSS PCO and PCV; discussion document N/A N/A
Ericsson (Ref R2-2304044) N/A N/A LS on SSR orbit and clock correction reference for BDS in 3GPP LPP; Release 16 Work Item: NR_pos-Core Contact person: Fredrik Gunnarsson; email address: fredrik.gunnarsson@ericsson.com; attachment included
Ericsson (Ref R2-2304045) N/A N/A Report from [Post121][401][POS] LS on SSR orbit and clock correction reference for BDS (Ericsson); WID/SID: NR_pos-Core Document for discussion and agreement; proposal related to outcome of discussion










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 5.3.2 : RRC corrections
Entity SI Update posSIB-r16 vs posSIB-r17 3GPP TSG-RAN2 Meeting Short Message Transmission on PDCCH P-RNTI DCI Format 1_0
Huawei, HiSilicon Correction (R2-2302985, R2-2302986) posSIB-r16 (R2-2302985) vs posSIB-r17 (R2-2302986) #121-bis-e, Online, 17th-26th April 2023 Transmitted on PDCCH, with or without Paging message Using P-RNTI (R2-2302985, R2-2302986) Associated with Short Message TS 38.212 [17], clause 7.3.1.2.1 (R2-2302985, R2-2302986)










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 5.3.3 : LPP corrections
Entity NR DL-TDOA Location Information Elements NR DL-TDOA-SignalMeasurementInformation Location Server Behavior GNSS Assistance Data Elements GNSS-ReferenceTime
Huawei, HiSilicon (Ref R2-2302989, R2-2302990) Correction to nr-DL-TDOA-AdditionalMeasurements-r16, r17 Used by target device to provide NR DL-TDOA measurements to location server - - -
Ericsson (Ref R2-2304046, R2-2304047, R2-2304048) - - Correction of location server behavior 6.5.2.2 GNSS Assistance Data Elements Used by location server to provide GNSS specific system time, uncertainty, and relationship between GNSS system time and network air-interface timing of eNodeB/NodeB/BTS transmission in reference cell


TDoc comparison: R2-2304047 (Ericsson) R2-2304048 (Ericsson)

Technical Differences between TDoc R2-2304047 and R2-2304048:

1. The only difference between the two TDocs is their document number, as all the content is identical.

Example: "Beginning of Changes 6.5.2.2 GNSS Assistance Data Elements – GNSS-ReferenceTime The IE GNSS-ReferenceTime is used by the location server to provide the GNSS specific system time with uncertainty and the relationship between GNSS system time and network air-interface timing of the eNodeB/NodeB/BTS transmission in the reference cell. The location server always transmit the GNSS-RealTimeIntegrity with the current list of unhealthy signals (i.e., not only for signals/SVs currently visible at the reference location), for any GNSS positioning attempt and whenever GNSS assistance data are sent."

2. Both TDocs discuss the IE GNSS-ReferenceTime, which provides the GNSS system time with uncertainty and the relationship between GNSS system time and network air-interface timing of the eNodeB/NodeB/BTS transmission in the reference cell.

Example: "The IE GNSS-ReferenceTime is used by the location server to provide the GNSS specific system time with uncertainty and the relationship between GNSS system time and network air-interface timing of the eNodeB/NodeB/BTS transmission in the reference cell."

3. Both TDocs mention that the location server always transmits the GNSS-RealTimeIntegrity with the current list of unhealthy signals for any GNSS positioning attempt and whenever GNSS assistance data are sent.

Example: "The location server always transmit the GNSS-RealTimeIntegrity with the current list of unhealthy signals (i.e., not only for signals/SVs currently visible at the reference location), for any GNSS positioning attempt and whenever GNSS assistance data are sent."

4. Both TDocs cover the IE GNSS-AcquisitionAssistance, which provides parameters for fast acquisition of GNSS signals, using GPS TOW as an exemplary reference.

Example: "The IE GNSS-AcquisitionAssistance is used by the location server to provide parameters that enable fast acquisition of the GNSS signals. Figure 6.5.2.2-1 illustrates the relation between some of the fields, using GPS TOW as exemplary reference."

5. Both TDocs describe the IE GNSS-DifferentialCorrections, which provides differential GNSS corrections to the target device for a specific GNSS.

Example: "The IE GNSS-DifferentialCorrections is used by the location server to provide differential GNSS corrections to the target device for a specific GNSS."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 5.3.4 : MAC corrections
Entity DL MAC CE (R2-2303501) SP Positioning SRS (R2-2303501) MAC subheader with eLCID (R2-2303501) A/D field (R2-2303501) DL MAC CE (R2-2303502) SP Positioning SRS (R2-2303502) MAC subheader with eLCID (R2-2303502) A/D field (R2-2303502)
ZTE Corporation Correction, 6.1.3.36 Activation/Deactivation, variable size Table 6.2.1-1b, identified Activate/Deactivate, indicated resource set Correction, 6.1.3.36 Activation/Deactivation, variable size Table 6.2.1-1b, identified Activate/Deactivate, indicated resource set










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 5.4.3 : RRC corrections
Entity RLF Cause RLF Report Content MeasResultSCG-Failure Location Configuration
Samsung (R2-2302942, R2-2302943, R2-2302952) Clarification on RLF Cause, Option 1: t310-Expiry, randomAccessProblem, rlc-MaxNumRetx, beamFailureRecoveryFailure, lbtFailure, bh-rlfRecoveryFailure; Option 2: same as Option 1, but in UEInformationResponse message.
Ericsson, Qualcomm (R2-2303447, R2-2303448) Correction on logging RLM resources in RLF report, includes setting plmn-IdentityList with EPLMNs stored by UE.
Ericsson (R2-2303449, R2-2303450) Correction to setting locationInfo in MeasResultSCG-Failure, includes ordering cells based on measurement results and setting optional fields.
Huawei, HiSilicon (R2-2303897) Discussion on location configuration for SON and MDT features, such as GNSS, Bluetooth, WLAN, Sensor.


TDoc comparison: R2-2303447 (Ericsson, Qualcomm) R2-2303448 (Ericsson, Qualcomm) R2-2303449 (Ericsson) R2-2303450 (Ericsson)

TDoc R2-2303447:

- For each configured EUTRA frequency with available measurements, the best measured cells are listed in measResultNeighCells, ordered by RSRP or RSRQ.
- Optional fields for each neighbour cell included in measResultNeighCells are also included.
- Measured quantities are filtered by the L3 filter as configured in the mobility measurement configuration.
- If SS/PBCH block-based measurement quantities are available, the rsIndexResults in measResultLastServCell include all available measurement quantities of the source.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303447: "set the measResultListEUTRA in measResultNeighCells to include the best measured cells ordered such that the cell with highest RSRP is listed first if RSRP measurement results are available, otherwise the cell with highest RSRQ is listed first."

TDoc R2-2303448:

- If failure is detected due to reconfiguration with sync failure, the connectionFailureType in VarRLF-report is set to hof.
- If the UE supports RLF-Report for DAPS handover and any DAPS bearer was configured while T304 was running, lastHO-Type is set to daps.
- If radio link failure is detected in the source PCell, timeConnSourceDAPS-Failure is set to the time between the initiation of the DAPS handover execution and the radio link failure detected in the source.
- If CSI-RS based measurement quantities are available, the measResultListNR in measResultNeighCells includes all available measurement quantities of the best measured cells.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303448: "set the connectionFailureType to hof" and "set the measResultListNR in measResultNeighCells to include all the available measurement quantities of the best measured cells."

TDoc R2-2303449:

- For each MeasObjectNR with a configured measId and available measurement results, an entry is included in measResultPerMOList.
- If rsType is set to ssb in the reportConfig associated with the MeasObjectNR, ssbFrequency is set to the value indicated by ssbFrequency in the MeasObjectNR.
- If rsType is set to csi-rs in the reportConfig associated with the MeasObjectNR, refFreqCSI-RS is set to the value indicated by refFreqCSI-RS in the associated measurement object.
- If a serving cell is associated with the MeasObjectNR, measResultServingCell includes available quantities of the concerned cell.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303449: "include an entry in measResultPerMOList" and "set ssbFrequency to the value indicated by ssbFrequency as included in the MeasObjectNR."

TDoc R2-2303450:

- Same as TDoc R2-2303449.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303450: "for each MeasObjectNR configured on NR SCG for which a measId is configured and measurement results are available" and "set measResultServingCell to include the available quantities of the concerned cell."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.1.1 : Stage 2 and Organisational
Entity Reference Subcarrier Spacing (R2-2302405) K2 Indication for Multi-PUSCH Scheduling (R2-2302408) PDCCH Skipping (R2-2302416) Rel-17 RAN4 UE Feature List for NR (R2-2302427) ue-PowerClassPerBandPerBC-r17 (R2-2302435) Max Aggregated Bandwidth for FR1 CA (R2-2302439) FR2 FBG5 CA BW Classes (R2-2302440)
RAN1 Rel-17, NR_ext_to_71GHz-Core, contact: Nokia (R1-2302185) Release 17, NR_ext_to_71GHz-Core, contact: LGE (R1-2302144) Rel-17, NR_UE_pow_sav_enh-Core, contact: MediaTek (R1-2302151) - - - -
RAN2 - - - - - - -
RAN4 - - - Release 17, FS_NR_duplex_evo, contact: CMCC (R4-2300820) Rel-17, NR_RF_FR1_enh, contact: Samsung (R4-2303630) Rel-17, BCS4-Core, contact: Qualcomm (R4-2303685) Release 17, NR_RF_FR2_req_enh2-Core, contact: Apple (R4-2303689)
SA3 - - - - - - -
Lenovo - - - - - - -
Ericsson - - - - - - -


TDoc comparison: R2-2302405 (RAN1) R2-2302416 (RAN1)

[TDoc R2-2302405]:

- Technical difference: RAN1 is requesting RAN2 to implement restrictions on applicable reference subcarrier spacings in CO-DurationsPerCell-r17.
- Supporting example snippet from TDoc: "RAN1 kindly requests RAN2 implement the restrictions on the applicable reference subcarrier spacings in CO-DurationsPerCell-r17."
- Technical difference: Agreement was made by RAN WG1 that certain values could and could not be configured as reference subcarrier spacing in CO-DurationsPerCell-r17.
- Supporting example snippet from TDoc: "The values 120/480/960 kHz can be configured as reference subcarrier spacing in CO-DurationsPerCell-r17, and the values 15/30/60 kHz cannot be configured as reference subcarrier spacing in CO-DurationsPerCell-r17."

[TDoc R2-2302416]:

- Technical difference: RAN1 is thanking RAN2 for a reply LS on PDCCH skipping in R1-2300020/R2-2213349.
- Supporting example snippet from TDoc: "RAN1 thanks RAN2 for the reply LS on PDCCH skipping in R1-2300020/R2-2213349."
- Technical difference: TSG-RAN WG1 is scheduling upcoming meetings in April and May 2023.
- Supporting example snippet from TDoc: "TSG-RAN WG1 Meeting #112-bis-e 17 – 26 Apr. 2023 Online e-Meeting TSG-RAN WG1 Meeting #113 22 – 26 May 2023 Incheon, KR."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302427 (RAN4) R2-2302436 (RAN4) R2-2302454 (RAN1) R2-2302456 (RAN1)

• TDoc R2-2302427: This TDoc pertains to the update of the UE feature group 14-2 for NR positioning enhancement. RAN4 would like to inform RAN2 about the updates. The attached R4-2303687.zip contains the Rel-17 RAN4 UE feature list for NR.

• TDoc R2-2302436: RAN4 thanks RAN2 for bringing the issue to their attention and notes that in the RAN2 LS, the applicable WI code was NR_RF_FR2_req_enh2-Core which is not the correct WI for FR1 FBG3. The title of the LS is "Reply LS on new contiguous BW classes for legacy networks." The attached specifications are R4-2303636, R4-2301637, and R4-2301638.

• TDoc R2-2302454: This TDoc pertains to the Rel-17 RAN1 UE features list for NR. RAN1 has continued to discuss the list and would like to share the latest version with RAN2. RAN1 kindly asks RAN2 to take into account the RAN1 NR UE features in the attachment for designing corresponding capability signaling in Rel.17. The attached R1-2302024 contains the updated feature list.

• TDoc R2-2302456: This TDoc pertains to the reply LS to RAN2 on further questions on feMIMO RRC parameters. RAN1 confirms that 1) is the correct understanding for pathlossReferenceRS-Id. The title of the LS is "Reply LS to RAN2 on further questions on feMIMO RRC parameters." The attached specification is R2-2302295.

These TDocs differ in terms of their subject matter, such as updates to UE feature lists, clarification on RRC parameters, and new contiguous BW classes for legacy networks. They also differ in the attachments they contain, with some TDocs having zip files and others having specific specifications attached. Lastly, these TDocs have different action items, such as requests for RAN2 to take information into account or for RAN4 to inform RAN2 about updates.

TDoc comparison: R2-2302439 (RAN4) R2-2302440 (RAN4) R2-2302453 (SA3) R2-2302457 (RAN3)

TDoc R2-2302439:

- Legacy approach of using multiple combinations of feature sets (Option 1) can be used to indicate possible supported CBW without specification change, but there is concern about high signaling overhead.
- New IE applies to inter-band carrier aggregation and conveys the maximum aggregated bandwidth value for each band combination.
- The new IE would need to signal independent values for UL and DL.
- The new IE would need to be signaled per band combination.

Example snippet: "RAN4 defers to RAN2’s decision on whether to introduce an IE as proposed above with the considerations of signaling overhead reduction, backwards compatibility, inter-operation and impacts on RAN2 specifications."

TDoc R2-2302440:

- Reusing frequency separation classes can indicate UE's maximum aggregated BW capability for contiguous CA, avoiding complicated FeatureSet signaling for FBG5 CA BW classes.
- Repurposing existing IE defined for intra-band non-contiguous CA frequency separation classes can be used to indicate UE's maximum aggregated BW capability for contiguous CA.
- Repurposing the existing IE would be independent from UE's per CC BW capability and avoid introducing a new parameter.

Example snippet: "RAN4 has considered that this could be achieved by repurposing the existing IE defined for intra-band non-contiguous CA frequency separation classes to also be applicable to indicate UE’s maximum aggregated BW capability for intra-band contiguous CA which would be independent from UE’s per CC BW capability, and thereby avoiding introduction of a new parameter."

TDoc R2-2302453:

- SA3 requests RAN3 to provide a suitable method for Source/Initial Donor-IAB node to know the mapping between old and new IP addresses for security work.
- Source/Initial Donor IAB-node needs to know mapping between old IP address of F1-C interface and new IP address for IPsec connection used to protect the F1-C interface.
- Mapping is needed to identify security credentials for re-establishing using IKE, especially for IPsec transport mode and when there are one or more old/new IP addresses.

Example snippet: "SA3 asks RAN3 to provide a suitable method for Source/Initial Donor-IAB node to know the mapping between these IP addresses in order for SA3 to progress with its security work."

TDoc R2-2302457:

- Motivation for specifying RAN visible QoE reports to be sent together with legacy QoE reports is to achieve a simple and straightforward reporting mechanism.
- RAN visible QoE reports are sent with legacy QoE reports over the air interface when periodicity is not explicitly configured.
- RAN visible QoE reports continue to be reported with the reporting periodicity configured for legacy QoE reporting during RAN overload, while legacy QoE reports are stored.

Example snippet: "When the RAN visible QoE reporting periodicity is not explicitly configured, the requirement that RAN visible QoE reports should be sent together with the legacy QoE reports is intended for the application layer."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303204 (Lenovo) R2-2303205 (Lenovo, Ericsson)

• The scheduler on IAB-DU or IAB-donor-DU complies with gNB-DU resource configuration received via F1AP to account for duplexing constraint.

Example: "The scheduler on an IAB-DU or IAB-donor-DU complies with the gNB-DU resource configuration received via F1AP, which defines the usage of scheduling resources to account for the aforementioned duplexing constraint." [TDoc R2-2303204]

• Guard symbols can be used to overcome misaligned symbol boundaries between IAB-MT and IAB-DU operation to facilitate transitioning.

Example: "To facilitate transitioning from IAB-MT to IAB-DU operation and vice versa, guard symbols can be used to overcome potentially misaligned symbol boundaries between the IAB-MT operation and the IAB-DU operation" [TDoc R2-2303204]

• Resource configuration can be shared among neighboring IAB-nodes and IAB-donors for interference management, dual connectivity, and enhanced multiplexing.

Example: "The resource configuration can be shared among neighboring IAB-nodes and IAB-donors to facilitate interference management, dual connectivity, and enhanced multiplexing." [TDoc R2-2303204]

• Correct transmission/reception by one IAB-DU or IAB-MT cannot be guaranteed during transmission/reception by the other due to half-duplex constraint.

Example: "If the IAB-DU and the IAB-MT of an IAB-node are subject to a half-duplex constraint, correct transmission/reception by one cannot be guaranteed during transmission/reception by the other and vice versa, e.g., when collocated and operating in the same frequency." [TDoc R2-2303204 & TDoc R2-2303205]

• Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) can be used to schedule DL transmissions on PDSCH and UL transmissions on PUSCH.

Example: "The Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) can be used to schedule DL transmissions on PDSCH and UL transmissions on PUSCH, where the Downlink Control Information (DCI) on PDCCH includes" [TDoc R2-2303205]

• Downlink assignments contain modulation and coding format, resource allocation, and hybrid-ARQ information related to DL-SCH.

Example: "Downlink assignments containing at least modulation and coding format, resource allocation, and hybrid-ARQ information related to DL-SCH" [TDoc R2-2303205]

• Uplink scheduling grants contain modulation and coding format, resource allocation, and hybrid-ARQ information related to UL-SCH.

Example: "Uplink scheduling grants containing at least modulation and coding format, resource allocation, and hybrid-ARQ information related to UL-SCH" [TDoc R2-2303205]









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.1.2 : User Plane corrections
Entity Small Data Transmission (SDT) IAB Beam Management NCD-SSB for RedCap MAC Reset for eIAB HARQ Buffer Flush Configured Grant Types Random Access Procedure Restricted Resources for eIAB
vivo, Huawei, HiSilicon, Guangdong Genius [R2-2302660] MAC entity configuration, RA-SDT, CG-SDT, RRC layer initiation [R2-2302660]
ZTE, Sanechips [R2-2303003] TS 38.321, IAB-DU Restricted Beam Indication, spatial and frequency resources [R2-2303003]
Huawei, HiSilicon [R2-2303136] 38.321 CR 1584, NR_redcap-Core, corrections [R2-2303136]
Huawei, HiSilicon [R2-2303480] 5.12 MAC Reset, SCG deactivation, Bj and SBj initialization [R2-2303480]
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [R2-2303686] 5.29 Activation/Deactivation of SCG, Random Access Procedure [R2-2303686]
LG Electronics Inc. [R2-2303756] 5.8.2 Uplink, configured grant Type 1 and Type 2 [R2-2303756]
ASUSTeK [R2-2303916] 5.4.1 UL Grant reception, HARQ Process ID, PUSCH duration [R2-2303916]
LG Electronics. [R2-2304057] 5.8.2 Uplink, configured grant Type 1 and Type 2 [R2-2304057]
Ericsson [R2-2304097] 5.18.26 IAB-DU Restricted Beam Indication, spatial and frequency resources [R2-2304097]


TDoc comparison: R2-2302660 (vivo, Huawei, HiSilicon, Guangdong Genius) R2-2303136 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303756 (LG Electronics Inc.) R2-2304057 (LG Electronics.)

TDoc R2-2302660:

- The MAC entity considers data volume of pending UL data across all RBs configured for SDT and the RSRP of downlink pathloss reference for SDT procedure.
- If the data volume is less than or equal to sdt-DataVolumeThreshold and RSRP is higher than sdt-RSRP-Threshold (if configured), SDT procedure is initiated.
- If Serving Cell is configured with supplementary uplink and RA-SDT is selected after successful Random Access procedure, UE monitors PDCCH addressed to C-RNTI until RA-SDT procedure is terminated.
- If conditions for initiating SDT procedure are not fulfilled, MAC entity indicates to upper layers.

TDoc R2-2303136:

- For 2-step RA type, if contention-free RA type Resources associated with SSBs are provided in rach-ConfigDedicated and at least one SSB with SS-RSRP above msgA-RSRP-ThresholdSSB is available, MAC entity selects that SSB and sets PREAMBLE_INDEX to ra-PreambleIndex corresponding to the selected SSB.
- If a CSI-RS is selected and no contention-free Random Access Resource is associated with it, MAC entity determines the next available PRACH occasion from PRACH occasions permitted by restrictions given by ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex corresponding to the SSB in candidateBeamRSList which is quasi-colocated with the selected CSI-RS.

TDoc R2-2303756:

- For subsequent new transmission for CG-SDT, if SS-RSRP of the SSB selected for previous transmission is above cg-SDT-RSRP-ThresholdSSB and associated with configured uplink grant, MAC entity selects that SSB.
- If cg-nrofPUSCH-InSlot or cg-nrofSlots is configured for a configured grant Type 1 or Type 2, MAC entity considers uplink grants occurring in those additional PUSCH allocations.
- After uplink grant is configured for a configured grant Type 2, MAC entity considers sequentially that the Nth uplink grant occurs in the symbol for which RRC configures cs-RNTI.

TDoc R2-2304057:

- Same as TDoc R2-2303756.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303480 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303686 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

TDoc R2-2303480:

• Clause 5.12 describes MAC reset and its initialization process for logical channels.

• If a MAC reset is requested by upper layers or triggered due to SCG deactivation, the MAC entity shall initialize Bj and SBj for each logical channel to zero.

• If the MAC reset is not due to SCG deactivation, SBj for each logical channel will be initialized to zero only if Sidelink resource allocation mode 1 is configured by RRC.

• If upper layers indicate SCG deactivation and bfd-and-RLM with value true is configured for the deactivated SCG, all timers except beamFailureDetectionTimer associated with PSCell and timeAlignmentTimers will be stopped (if running).

TDoc R2-2303686:

• Subclause 5.29 describes the activation/deactivation of SCG.

• If upper layers indicate that the SCG is deactivated, all the SCells of the SCG will be deactivated according to clause 5.9.

• If the network activates and deactivates the configured SCG, the activation will be done according to the timing defined in TS 38.133.

• If any suspended configured uplink grants of configured grant Type 1 associated with this PSCell are present, they will be (re-)initialized, and normal SCG operation will be applied, including SRS transmissions, CSI reporting, PDCCH monitoring, PUCCH transmissions, and transmission on RACH on the PSCell.

• Bj for each logical channel will be initialized to zero.

Examples from TDoc R2-2303480:

• "If a reset of the MAC entity is requested by upper layers or the reset of the MAC entity is triggered due to SCG deactivation as defined in clause 5.29, the MAC entity shall..."

• "If upper layers indicate SCG deactivation and bfd-and-RLM with value true is configured for the deactivated SCG: stop (if running) all timers except beamFailureDetectionTimer associated with PSCell and timeAlignmentTimers."

Examples from TDoc R2-2303686:

• "If upper layers indicate that the SCG is deactivated: deactivate all the SCells of the SCG according to clause 5.9; activate the SCG according to the timing defined in TS 38.133."

• "If any suspended configured uplink grants of configured grant Type 1 associated with this PSCell are present, they will be (re-)initialized, and normal SCG operation will be applied, including SRS transmissions, CSI reporting, PDCCH monitoring, PUCCH transmissions, and transmission on RACH on the PSCell."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303003 (ZTE, Sanechips) R2-2304097 (Ericsson)

Technical differences between the two TDocs include:

1. DL TX Power Adjustment MAC CE: The updated TDoc includes a new MAC CE called "Desired DL TX Power Adjustment MAC CE" which is used by an IAB-node to indicate recommendations for restrictions on simultaneous transmission/reception from the IAB-MT and transmission from the IAB-DU cells. The time resources where these restrictions/recommendations apply are indicated via RRC.

Example: "Desired DL TX Power Adjustment MAC CE is used by an IAB-node to indicate to its parent node recommendations for such a restriction. Time resources where these restrictions/recommendations apply are indicated via RRC."

2. Use of spatial and frequency resources: In the original TDoc, the IAB-DU Restricted Beam Indication MAC CE is used by an IAB-node to indicate to its child node spatial and frequency resources where simultaneous transmission/reception from the IAB-MT and transmission from the IAB-DU cells is restricted. In the updated TDoc, the MAC CE is used to indicate spatial and resources where such transmission/reception is restricted.

Example: "Restricted Beam Indication MAC CE is used by an IAB-node to indicate to its child node spatial and resources where simultaneous transmission/reception from the IAB-MT and transmission from the IAB-DU cells is restricted."

3. Cancelled IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication query: In the original TDoc, if the MAC entity has UL resources allocated for new transmission, it cancels any IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication query that has been triggered and not cancelled. The updated TDoc includes the same instruction, but the cancellation is explicitly stated after the Multiplexing and Assembly procedure generates the MAC CE.

Example: "For each IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication query that has been triggered and not cancelled: if the allocated UL resources can accommodate a IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication MAC CE plus its subheader as a result of LCP as defined in clause 5.4.3.1: instruct the Multiplexing and Assembly procedure to generate the IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication MAC CE; cancel this IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication query."

4. Reference to TS 38.331: The updated TDoc includes a reference to TS 38.331 which specifies the IAB-ResourceConfig.

Example: "If the MAC entity has UL resources allocated for new transmission, the MAC entity shall: for each IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication query that has been triggered and not cancelled: if the allocated UL resources can accommodate a IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication MAC CE plus its subheader as a result of LCP as defined in clause 5.4.3.1: instruct the Multiplexing and Assembly procedure to generate the IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication MAC CE; cancel this IAB-MT Recommended Beam Indication query."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.1.3 : Control Plane corrections
Entity Aperiodic MUSIM Gap Handling eDRX in RRC_INACTIVE Discontinuous Reception for Paging RLM and BFD Relaxation
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell (Ref R2-2303195) Mobility, aperiodic gap configuration, discussion, decision, MUSIM-Enhancements-Release 17 (Ref R2-2303195) - - -
Ericsson (Ref R2-2303616) - Corrections, eDRX, RRC_INACTIVE, power consumption (Ref R2-2303616) DRX, RRC_IDLE, RRC_INACTIVE, power consumption (Ref R2-2303616) -
Ericsson (Ref R2-2303617) - - - RLM, BFD, measurement relaxation, SCG deactivated, discussion, decision (Ref R2-2303617)










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.1.3.2 : UE capabilities
Entity ue-PowerClassPerBandPerBC-r17 Maximum Aggregated Bandwidth FR1 CA IndependentGapConfig-maxCC-r17 DMRS Bundling over TBoMS FeatureSetUplink parameters eIAB Capabilities FBG5 Signaling
OPPO Power class per individual band within a band combination [R2-2302575] Use existing IE for intra-band non-contiguous CA frequency separation classes [R2-2302577]
Qualcomm Incorporated UE support limitations for component carrier bandwidths in some band combinations [R2-2302729]
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell Clarify description of IndependentGapConfig-maxCC-r17 [MaxCCPerFRGap] [R2-2302774]
Ericsson Clarify band combination meaning for DMRS Bundling over TBoMS [R2-2302887]
Samsung Clarify on ue-PowerClassPerBandPerBC [R2-2302941]
Apple Inc, Ericsson Inc Aggregate BW signaling for FBG5 CA BW classes [R2-2303398]
Huawei, HiSilicon Corrections on eIAB related capabilities [R2-2303479]
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips Miscellaneous correction on UE capability-R17, consideration on FBG5 signaling [R2-2303882, R2-2303883]


TDoc comparison: R2-2302575 (OPPO) R2-2302577 (OPPO) R2-2302729 (Qualcomm Incorporated)

Technical Differences:

1. ue-PowerClassPerBandPerBC-r17 vs powerClass or powerClass-v1610: The former indicates the power class that a UE supports for each individual band within a given band combination, while the latter indicates the power class for this band combination, i.e., the maximum total output power.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302575: "If indicated, ue-PowerClassPerBandPerBC-r17 shall supersede other power class capabilities such as ue-PowerClass/powerClass and its extensions in determining the power class of the individual bands within a band combination."

2. Intra-band non-contiguous CA frequency separation classes vs UE’s maximum aggregated BW capability for intra-band contiguous CA: RAN4 has considered repurposing the former to also indicate the latter, thereby avoiding introducing a new parameter.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302577: "…it seems no difference compared to introducing a new IE, since 1/ signaling-wise, it is the same, since the old intraBandFreqSeparationDL will not be reported for the case of intra-band or inter-band case without non-contiguous block; 2/ repurposing the existing IE would cause misunderstanding, i.e., a frequency-separation IE indicates max-agg-BW."

3. New UE capability signalling solution “option 2” vs legacy rules for CC bandwidth capability: The former is an attractive solution to reduce UE capability signalling overhead.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302729: "Proposal 2: RAN2 to confirm there is no practical backward compatibility problems if the use of the new UE capability signalling solution “option 2” is limited to FR1 inter-band CA band combinations with BCS5. Proposal 4: The legacy rules for CC bandwidth capability applies when the UE does not signal the new capability parameter indicating the supported maximum aggregated bandwidth."

In summary, the technical differences among the TDcos are related to power class capabilities, maximum aggregated bandwidth, and repurposing of existing parameters. The examples provided in the original TDcos help to clarify these differences and highlight the proposed solutions.

TDoc comparison: R2-2302774 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2302887 (Ericsson) R2-2303479 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304168 (Huawei, HiSilicon, Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

April 2023

TDoc R2-2302774:
- Modified Subclause 4.2.9 MeasAndMobParameters
- No specific example snippets provided

TDoc R2-2302887:
- Refers to 3GPP 38.306 version 17.4.0
- Includes subclause 4.2.7.4 CA-ParametersNR
- No specific example snippets provided

TDoc R2-2303479:
- Changes made to subclauses 4.2.15.2, 4.2.15.5, 4.2.15.6, and 4.2.15.7.2
- Example snippet from TDoc: "Start of Change 4.2.15.2 General Parameters"

TDoc R2-2304168:
- Includes SEQUENCE definitions for various band combinations and uplink Tx switching options
- Example snippet from TDoc: "BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch-v1730 ::= SEQUENCE { bandCombination-v1730 BandCombination-v1730 OPTIONAL }"

Overall, these TDocs differ in terms of the specific subclauses and parameters being modified or defined, as well as the versions of 3GPP documents being referenced. Example snippets from the original TDocs provide specific details about the changes being made.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303398 (Apple Inc, Ericsson Inc) R2-2303883 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2304167 (Huawei, HiSilicon, Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2304169 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

1. Observation 6: RAN2 should re-visit a topic and view the arguments made against an approach based on the latest LS reply, considering the interest and consensus from RAN4.
Example snippet: "Considering the interest (and consensus in that interest) from RAN4, RAN2 should re-visit the topic and view the arguments made against this approach based on the latest view from the LS reply."

2. Observation 5: Existing FeatureSetDL/UL and FPSC can allow UE signaling of capability in multiple ways, allowing gNBs to derive the UE capability.
Example snippet: "Regarding the point on UE reporting the capability in multiple ways, we think the existing FeatureSetDL/UL and FPSC can allow such signaling anyway, and gNBs should be able to derive the UE capability."

3. LS suggests a possible way of signaling (re-using an existing field) to convey the aggregated BW support by the UE for the FBG5 CA BW class.
Example snippet: "This LS suggests a possible way of signaling (re-using an existing field) to convey the aggregated BW support by the UE for the FBG5 CA BW class."

4. Observation 2: "Re-purposing the existing IE "intraBandFreqSeparationDL" to indicate UE's maximum aggregated BW capability for contiguous CA" is not applicable to the BC with both intra-band contiguous and non-contiguous CA.
Example snippet: ""Re-purposing the existing IE "intraBandFreqSeparationDL" to indicate UE's maximum aggregated BW capability for contiguous CA" are not applicable to the BC with both intra-band contiguous and non-contiguous CA."

5. FR1 only intraBandENDC-Support indicates whether the UE supports intra-band (NG)EN-DC with only non-contiguous spectrum, or with both contiguous and non-contiguous spectrum for the (NG)EN-DC combination as specified in TS 38.101-3 [4].
Example snippet: "FR1 only intraBandENDC-Support Indicates whether the UE supports intra-band (NG)EN-DC with only non-contiguous spectrum, or with both contiguous and non-contiguous spectrum."

6. Add new capability signaling to indicate contiguous/non-contiguous capability for intra-band EN-DC in UL.
Example snippet: "Summary of change: Add new capability signaling to indicate contiguous/non-contiguous capability for intra-band EN-DC in UL."

7. Repurposing the existing intraBandFreqSeparationDL capability field to indicate the maximum aggregated BW for intra-band contiguous CA is considered helpful to mitigate the potential signaling overhead issue.
Example snippet: "By repurposing the existing intraBandFreqSeparationDL capability field to indicate the maximum aggregated BW for intra-band contiguous CA, it is considered helpful to mitigate the potential signaling overhead issue."

8. Repurposing the existing capability of intraBandFreqSeparationDL is a non-backward compatible way.
Example snippet: "Additionally, repurposing the existing capability of intraBandFreqSeparationDL is a non-backward compatible way."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.1.3.3 : Other
Entity Slice-based Reselection Information Cell Reselection Parameters Reselection Priorities RRM Relaxation Subgroup ID Slice-based Reselection without SIB16 SIB16 in RAN Slicing
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell (R2-2302861, R2-2302862) Relationship between dedicated signalling and SIB16 content, no conclusion at RAN2#121 [R2-2302861] absThreshSS-BlocksConsolidation, minimum threshold for beams used for cell measurement quantity [R2-2302862]
CATT (R2-2302983) Discussion on dedicated and broadcast signalling, handling NSAG-frequency pair not available in SIB16 [R2-2302983]
Huawei, HiSilicon, OPPO (R2-2303135) Corrections on RRM relaxation for RedCap, CR 0331 rev, 38.304 [R2-2303135]
Huawei, HiSilicon (R2-2303467) Clarification on UE_ID based subgrouping in RRC_INACTIVE state [R2-2303467]
Ericsson (R2-2303637, R2-2303638) Slice-based re-selection based on dedicated signalling only, without broadcasting SIB16 [R2-2303637, R2-2303638]
Apple, OPPO (R2-2303740) Essentiality of SIB16 in RAN Slicing, contentious debate at last RAN2 [R2-2303740]
CATT (R2-2304039) Handling of slice availability in SIB16, correction in TS 38.304 [R2-2304039]
Samsung R&D Institute India (R2-2304041) Handling NSAG-Frequency pair present in dedicated signalling only [R2-2304041]


TDoc comparison: R2-2302862 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303638 (Ericsson) R2-2304039 (CATT) R2-2304041 (Samsung R&D Institute India)

Technical Differences between TDoc R2-2302862, R2-2303638, R2-2304039, and R2-2304041:

TDoc R2-2302862:
- It configures location-based measurement initiation and intra/inter-frequency cell reselection parameters.
- The reference location of the serving cell is used in location-based measurement initiation.
- The minimum threshold for beams, time period for Srxlev variation, and threshold for high-priority cells are specified.

Example snippet: "absThreshSS-BlocksConsolidation This specifies the minimum threshold for beams which can be used for selection of the highest ranked cells, if rangeToBestCell is configured, and for beams used for derivation of cell measurement quantity."

TDoc R2-2303638:
- HSDN cells are given the highest priority in high-mobility state and the lowest priority in other states.
- Cell reselection evaluation is performed only for specified frequencies with priority.
- Only allow-listed cells are considered as candidates for cell reselection.

Example snippet: "The UE shall consider only the allow-listed cells, if configured, as candidates for cell reselection."

TDoc R2-2304039:
- Same as R2-2303638.

Example snippet: "The UE shall consider only the allow-listed cells, if configured, as candidates for cell reselection."

TDoc R2-2304041:
- UE behavior for slice-based cell reselection is controlled by a flag in RRC Release.
- Various options are available when the NSAG-Frequency pair is not available in SIB16.

Example snippet: "When the NSAG-Frequency pair configured in dedicated slice information is not available in the SIB16, consider the below options a. UE doesn’t use the NSAG-Frequency pair for deriving slice based cell reselection priority in this cell."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303135 (Huawei, HiSilicon, OPPO) R2-2303467 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303740 (Apple, OPPO)

TDoc R2-2303135:

- Capture of 1RX RedCap specific offset for broadcasted cell specific RSRP thresholds for random access, SDT, cell edge condition, and cell (re)selection criterion
- Impacts NR Standalone architecture option and Rel-16/Rel-17 not-at-cell-edge criterion functionality
- No interoperability issues if UE is implemented according to CR while network is not
- Compensation for measurement performance of 1 Rx RedCap UEs does not work for Rel-16/Rel-17 not-at-cell-edge criterion if not approved

Example snippet: "A RedCap UE with 1 Rx branch applies the associated offset for broadcasted cell specific RSRP thresholds for random access, SDT, cell edge condition and cell (re)selection criterion as specified in TS 38.133"

TDoc R2-2303467:

- Calculation of subgroup ID for UE based on N, Ns, and UE_ID
- UE belonging to SubgroupID monitors associated PEI for paged subgroup(s)
- Impacts DRX cycle of RRC_IDLE state, number of total paging frames, and number of paging occasions
- No change to functionality, only clarification

Example snippet: "SubgroupID = (floor(UE_ID/(N*Ns) + (subgroupsNumPerPO - subgroupsNumForUEID), where: N: number of total paging frames in T, which is the DRX cycle of RRC_IDLE state as specified in clause 7.1"

TDoc R2-2303740:

- Procedure for UE performing slice-based cell reselection when highest ranked cell or best cell in a frequency does not support NSAG according to clause
- UE re-derives reselection priority for frequency by considering supported NSAG(s) or as if none of the NSAG(s) provided by NAS is supported
- No impact on interoperability, impacts slice-based cell reselection functionality
- Only applies if UE is performing slice-based cell reselection

Example snippet: "For a UE performing slice-based cell reselection, if the highest ranked cell or best cell in a frequency fulfils the inter- freqeuency cell reselection criteria (see clause 5.2.4.5) based on reselection priority for the frequency and NSAG derived according to this clause or fulfils intra-frequency and equal priority inter-frequency cell reselection criteria (see clause 5.2.4.6), but this cell does not support the NSAG according to this clause"









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.2.1 : Organizational and Stage-2 corrections
Entity SPS Configuration Unicast & Multicast MBS Resource Efficiency Service Area UE Reception PTM
RAN1 (R1-2302209) Reply LS on SPS configuration (R2-2302406) Unicast and multicast configuration NR_MBS-Core Work Item - - - -
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell (R2-2303126) General MBS CR to 38.300 - 16.10 Multicast & Broadcast Services Resource-efficient delivery of MBS Geographical area, TS 23.247 [45] - -
Ericsson (R2-2304154) - MBS broadcast via unicast - - - UE does not request/release unicast bearer Cell where session is provided via PTM










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.2.2 : CP corrections
Entity PLMN index for SNPN (R2-2302522) Transfer PLMN IDs (R2-2302522) MBS Interest Indication (R2-2302523) PDSCH Aggregation of MBS SPS (R2-2302590) CP Corrections for MBS (R2-2302823) Key Refresh in MBS (R2-2303031) General MBS CR to 38.331 (R2-2303127)
CATT, CBN Discuss PLMN index usage in SNPN (R2-2302522) Transfer non-serving SNPN PLMN IDs (R2-2302522)
vivo Modify MBS broadcast procedures (R2-2302523) Correct SPS-Config, PDSCH aggregation (R2-2302590) Clarify key refresh in MBS (R2-2303031)
Samsung Electronics Modify Paging message reception (R2-2302823)
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell Clarify RRC specification organization (R2-2303127)
ZTE, Sanechips
Ericsson
ASUSTeK
Huawei, HiSilicon
MediaTek


TDoc comparison: R2-2302522 (CATT, CBN) R2-2303967 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

TDoc R2-2302522:

- Proposal 2 suggests that PLMN IDs of non-serving SNPNs should not be transferred in MII message contained in inter-node message during handover.
- The SNPN ID (i.e., PLMN+NID) cannot replace plmn-index in inter-node message as the asn.1 structure does not support it.
- According to the agreement in RAN2#121, UE can report plmn index of non-serving SNPNs in MII message if it receives MBS broadcast on non-serving SNPNs.
- Only plmn-Index can be used if the TMGI is to be included in MII and it is for a broadcast service on a SNPN.
- HandoverPreparationInformation-IEs, spare3.

TDoc R2-2303967:

- The PDCCH indicates a DL multicast transmission.
- If HARQ feedback is enabled, start the drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL-PTM for the corresponding HARQ process in the first symbol after the end of the corresponding transmission carrying the DL HARQ feedback.
- If the PDCCH addressed to G-RNTI indicates a DL multicast transmission or if the PDCCH addressed to G-CS-RNTI indicates a DL multicast transmission and CS-RNTI is configured, start the drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL for the corresponding HARQ process in the first symbol after the end of the corresponding transmission carrying the DL HARQ feedback.
- Proposal 2 suggests adopting the 38.306 TP in the Annex33 to specify that the ehc-r16 and jointEHC-ROHC-Config-r16 are applicable for multicast MRBs.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303552 (ZTE, Sanechips) R2-2303919 (ASUSTeK) R2-2303966 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

[TDoc R2-2303552]: MBS-SessionInfoList information element:
- Defines a sequence that can have a minimum size of 1 and a maximum size of maxNrofMBS-Session-r17
- Each sequence element is defined by MBS-SessionInfo-r17, which includes:
- mbs-SessionId-r17: TMGI-r17
- g-RNTI-r17: RNTI-Value
- mrb-ListBroadcast-r17: MRB-ListBroadcast-r17
- mtch-SchedulingInfo-r17: DRX-ConfigPTM-Index-r17 OPTIONAL
- mtch-NeighbourCell-r17: BIT STRING (SIZE(maxNeighCellMBS-r17))
- TMGI-r17 information element:
- Defines a sequence that includes:
- plmn-Id-r17, which can be either:
- plmn-Index INTEGER (1..maxPLMN)
- explicitValue PLMN-Identity
- serviceId-r17 OCTET STRING (SIZE (3))

[TDoc R2-2303919]: DL-PPW-PreConfigToAddModList-r17 and DL-PPW-PreConfigToReleaseList-r17:
- Both define a sequence that can have a minimum size of 1 and a maximum size of maxNrofPPW-Config-r17
- DL-PPW-PreConfigToAddModList-r17 sequence elements are defined by DL-PPW-PreConfig-r17
- DL-PPW-PreConfigToReleaseList-r17 sequence elements are defined by DL-PPW-ID-r17

[TDoc R2-2303966]: CFR-ConfigMCCH-MTCH information element:
- Defines a sequence that includes:
- locationAndBandwidthBroadcast-r17, which is a choice between:
- sameAsSib1ConfiguredLocationAndBW NULL
- locationAndBandwidth INTEGER (0..37949)
- pdsch-ConfigMCCH-r17: PDSCH-ConfigBroadcast-r17 OPTIONAL
- commonControlResourceSetExt-r17: ControlResourceSet OPTIONAL -- Cond NotSIB1CommonControlResource
- ControlResourceSet is defined elsewhere in the TDoc.

Example snippets from the original TDoc:
- "MBS-SessionInfoList-r17 ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofMBS-Session-r17)) OF MBS-SessionInfo-r17"
- "TMGI-r17 ::= SEQUENCE { plmn-Id-r17 CHOICE { plmn-Index INTEGER (1..maxPLMN), explicitValue PLMN-Identity }, serviceId-r17 OCTET STRING (SIZE (3)) }"
- "DL-PPW-PreConfigToAddModList-r17 ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPPW-Config-r17)) OF DL-PPW-PreConfig-r17"
- "CFR-ConfigMCCH-MTCH-r17 ::= SEQUENCE { locationAndBandwidthBroadcast-r17 LocationAndBandwidthBroadcast-r17 OPTIONAL, -- Need S pdsch-ConfigMCCH-r17 PDSCH-ConfigBroadcast-r17 OPTIONAL, -- Need S commonControlResourceSetExt-r17 ControlResourceSet OPTIONAL -- Cond NotSIB1CommonControlResource }"

TDoc comparison: R2-2302823 (Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd) R2-2303031 (vivo) R2-2303127 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303619 (Ericsson)

TDoc R2-2302823:
- SRB3 can be used for various configuration and reporting purposes in (NG)EN-DC and NR-DC, including measurement, UE assistance, IP address and timer reconfiguration, and PDCP/SDAP reconfiguration.
- Only specific types of configurations are included in RRCReconfiguration received via SRB3 in (NG)EN-DC and NR-DC.
- RRC messages can be transmitted between the MN and UE during fast MCG link recovery.

TDoc R2-2303031:
- SRB3 can be used for conditional PSCell change configuration, but not if it requires MN involvement.
- Only specific types of configurations are included in RRCReconfiguration received via SRB3 in (NG)EN-DC and NR-DC, unless received within DLInformationTransferMRDC.

TDoc R2-2303127:
- The establishmentCause is set differently depending on the reason for RRC connection establishment, including mps-PriorityAccess or mcs-PriorityAccess.
- TA report initiation is indicated to lower layers if ta-Report is configured and the UE supports TA reporting.

TDoc R2-2303619:
- RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE tasks are subdivided into PLMN/SNPN selection, cell selection/reselection, and location registration/RNA update.
- Sidelink discovery transmissions may be performed by the U2N Remote UE or Relay UE for sidelink relay operations.
- Automatic or manual PLMN/SNPN selection is performed if coverage is lost.
- L2 U2N Remote UE in RRC_IDLE or RRC_INACTIVE may perform relevant procedures via L2 U2N Relay UE.
- ETWS and CMAS notifications can be received via RRC_IDLE or RRC_CONNECTED.

TDoc comparison: R2-2302590 (vivo) R2-2304146 (MediaTek inc.) R2-2304170 (MediaTek inc.)

[TDoc R2-2302590]:

- The TDoc introduces a new field called "sps-HARQ-Deferral-r17" with an integer range of (1..32).
- Another new field called "n1PUCCH-AN-PUCCHsSCell-r17 PUCCH-ResourceId" is added with an optional flag.
- A new field called "periodicityExt-r17" with an integer range of (1..40960) is added with an optional flag.
- A new field called "nrofHARQ-Processes-v1710" with an integer range of (9..32) is added with an optional flag.
- A new field called "harq-ProcID-Offset-v1700" with an integer range of (16..31) is added with an optional flag.

Example snippet:
- "sps-HARQ-Deferral-r17 INTEGER (1..32) OPTIONAL"
- "n1PUCCH-AN-PUCCHsSCell-r17 PUCCH-ResourceId OPTIONAL"
- "periodicityExt-r17 INTEGER (1..40960) OPTIONAL"
- "nrofHARQ-Processes-v1710 INTEGER(9..32) OPTIONAL"
- "harq-ProcID-Offset-v1700 INTEGER (16..31) OPTIONAL"


[TDoc R2-2304146]:

- The TDoc introduces a new information element called "SIB20-r17".
- Another new information element called "MCCH-Config-r17" is added with a reference of "#121-bis-e".
- A new information element called "cfr-ConfigMCCH-MTCH-r17" is added with an optional flag.
- A field called "lateNonCriticalExtension" with an optional flag is added.

Example snippet:
- "SIB20-r17 ::= SEQUENCE"
- "MCCH-Config-r17 ::= #121-bis-e"
- "cfr-ConfigMCCH-MTCH-r17 CFR-ConfigMCCH-MTCH-r17 OPTIONAL"
- "lateNonCriticalExtension OCTET STRING OPTIONAL"


[TDoc R2-2304170]:

- The TDoc introduces a new information element called "SIB20-r17".
- Another new information element called "MCCH-Config-r17" is added with a reference of "#121-bis-e".
- A new information element called "cfr-ConfigMCCH-MTCH-r17" is added with an optional flag.
- A field called "lateNonCriticalExtension" with an optional flag is added.

Example snippet:
- "SIB20-r17 ::= SEQUENCE"
- "MCCH-Config-r17 ::= #121-bis-e"
- "cfr-ConfigMCCH-MTCH-r17 CFR-ConfigMCCH-MTCH-r17 OPTIONAL"
- "lateNonCriticalExtension OCTET STRING OPTIONAL"









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.2.3 : UP corrections
Technical Concepts NEC Corporation, LG Electronics Inc, Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell, Samsung Samsung R&D Institute India
Discontinuous Reception (DRX) R2-2302767: Configured by RRC, controls UE's PDCCH monitoring activity, multiple RNTIs supported -
cfr-ConfigMulticast and Multicast DRX R2-2302768: Correction discussion, no need for CSI report if not included in active BWP -
UE's PDCCH monitoring activity R2-2302767: Controlled by DRX functionality -
CSI reporting R2-2302768: Not required if cfr-ConfigMulticast not in active BWP -
DL Assignment reception - R2-2303067: Indicates DL-SCH transmission, provides HARQ information
Downlink assignments on PDCCH - R2-2303067: Provides transmission and HARQ info for DL-SCH
DL-SCH transmission - R2-2303067: Indicated by downlink assignments on PDCCH
HARQ information - R2-2303067: Provided by downlink assignments on PDCCH










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.3.2 : User Plane
Entity One-shot HARQ feedback Discontinuous Reception (DRX) RNTI types MAC entity RRC configuration PDCCH monitoring UE's functionalities
ASUSTeK gNB sends UE one-shot HARQ feedback request, reports feedbacks of all processes (R2-2303920) Corrects DRX for one-shot HARQ feedback (R2-2303921) C-RNTI, CI-RNTI, CS-RNTI, INT-RNTI, SFI-RNTI, SP-CSI-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, TPC-SRS-RNTI, AI-RNTI, SL-RNTI, SLCS-RNTI, SL Semi-Persistent Scheduling V-RNTI (R2-2303921) Configured with DRX functionality (R2-2303921) DRX configuration by RRC (R2-2303921) Controls UE's PDCCH monitoring activity (R2-2303921) Reports HARQ feedbacks, monitors PDCCH for RNTI types (R2-2303920, R2-2303921)
Nokia Collaborates with ASUSTeK on DRX corrections for one-shot HARQ feedback (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK (R2-2303921)
Nokia Shanghai Bell Collaborates with ASUSTeK and Nokia on DRX corrections for one-shot HARQ feedback (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK and Nokia (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK and Nokia (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK and Nokia (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK and Nokia (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK and Nokia (R2-2303921) Same as ASUSTeK and Nokia (R2-2303921)










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.4.1 : User plane common aspects
Entity Random Access Resources RedCap HD-FDD CG-SDT Uplink Configured Grant Types Small Data Transmission Initiation of SDT Procedure
vivo [R2-2302664] 4-step RA, 2-step RA, MAC entity redCap set to true, Random Access procedure - - - - -
Ericsson [R2-2303699] - - Clarifying HD-FDD CG-SDT Transmission without dynamic grant, Uplink grant by RRC Configured grant Type 1, Configured grant Type 2, L1 signalling - -
Google Inc. [R2-2304179] - - - - - SDT procedure, RA-SDT, CG-SDT RRC layer, Random Access procedure with 2-step RA, 4-step RA










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.4.2 : Control plane common aspects
Entity UE Assistance Information PeriodicityExt Restriction RRCReject Handling Unknown Protocol Data Handling
vivo [Ref R2-2302665] UE informs network: delay budget, overheating, IDC, DRX, aggregated bandwidth, secondary component carriers, MIMO layers, cross-slot scheduling, RRC state, NR sidelink, reference time, FR2 UL gap, MUSIM, RLM, BFD, radio bearers, SCG, uplink data, RRM, service link [R2-2302665]
NEC Corporation [Ref R2-2303056] Correction on periodicityExt restriction in NR_SmallData_INACTIVE-Core [R2-2303056]
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [Ref R2-2303687] Clarification on RRCReject handling with UL data during Small Data Transmission (SDT) [R2-2303687]
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [Ref R2-2303688] Clarification on handling unknown, unforeseen, erroneous protocol data in MAC LCID, eLCID, discard subPDU, MAC PDU [R2-2303688]










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.5.1 : General and stage 2 corrections
Entity Direct to Indirect Path Switching Indirect to Direct Path Switching L2 UE-to-Network Relay Relay (Re)Selection
CATT L2 U2N Relay UE in RRC_IDLE, RRC_INACTIVE, RRC_CONNECTED; direct to indirect path switch [R2-2303154] Service continuity for L2 U2N Relay; L2 U2N Remote UE switching to direct path [R2-2303155]
Apple L2 U2N Relay architecture; user plane & control plane protocol stacks; Figures 16.12.2.1-1 & 16.12.2.1-2 [R2-2303384]
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips U2N Remote UE radio measurements at PC5 interface; U2N Relay reselection with higher layer criteria; TS 23.304 [48] [R2-2303858]










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.5.2 : Control plane corrections
Entities Concept 1 Concept 2 Concept 3 Concept 4 Concept 5 Concept 6 Concept 7 Concept 8
OPPO (R2-2302576) L2 U2N SL Relay, cross-feature compatibility, RRC_IDLE, RRC_INACTIVE, i_s, UE capability, network capability, ranPagingInIdlePO
Samsung Electronics (R2-2302593, R2-2302594) Paging monitoring, Relay UE, ASN.1, UuMessageTransferSidelink, SL-SRB3, RLC-SAP, AM, L2 U2N Relay UE, L2 U2N Remote UE
Xiaomi (R2-2303115, R2-2303656) Notification Message, sidelink, U2N Relay UE, U2N Remote UE, RRCReconfiguration, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink, PC5 Relay RLC channel, RRC_IDLE
CATT (R2-2303156) SL-BWP-PoolConfig, NR sidelink communication resource pool, SL-ResourcePoolID, SL-TxPoolDedicated, SL-ResourcePoolConfig, maxNrofPoolID
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips (R2-2303175, R2-2303176) Field Description, Common Resource Pool, NR sidelink discovery monitoring, Event X1, SL relay, 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2, sorting quantity, UTRA-FDD cell
vivo (R2-2303337, R2-2303338) PC5 RLC channel release, SRB0 handling, L2 U2N Remote UE, RRC connection establishment, RRC_IDLE, RRC_CONNECTED, T311, RRCReconfigurationSidelink
Apple (R2-2303385, R2-2303386) SRAP configuration, RRCReestablishment, UE handling, Layer 2 UE-to-NW relay, SIB12, sl-ConfigCommonNR, NR sidelink communication, NR sidelink discovery
Huawei, HiSilicon (R2-2303489, R2-2304189) Cell Barring, L2 U2N Remote UE, SIB12 reception, sidelink communication resource configuration, OoC L2 Remote UE, sl-FreqInfoList, sl-RxPool, sl-TxPoolSelectedNormal
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell (R2-2303656, R2-2304066) SIB12, L2 U2N Remote UE, RRC procedure, sl-L2RemoteUE-Config, sl-SRAP-ConfigRemote, SRAP entity, SL-RLC1, PC5 Relay RLC channel
Philips (R2-2303739) L2 U2N Relay Remote UE, RRC procedure, cellAccessRelatedInfo, PLMN-Identity, npn-IdentityList, trackingAreaCode, cellIdentity, SIB12
ASUSTeK (R2-2303983) Role of L2 U2N Remote UE, SIB1 reception, RedCap UE, RRC_IDLE, RRC_INACTIVE, RRC_CONNECTED, T311, cellBarredRedCap1Rx
Ericsson España (R2-2304066) Cell Barring, L2 U2N Remote UE, SIB12 reception, sidelink communication, sl-FreqInfoList, sl-RxPool, sl-TxPoolSelectedNormal, sl-TxPoolExceptional


TDoc comparison: R2-2302576 (OPPO) R2-2303115 (Xiaomi) R2-2303175 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303176 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303337 (vivo) R2-2303338 (vivo) R2-2303386 (Apple)

Technical differences among the TDocs:

1. TDoc R2-2302576: L2 U2N Relay + eDRX
- The UE may use DRX or eDRX for paging monitoring.
- If eDRX is configured by upper layers, the T value is determined by TeDRX, CN or TeDRX, RAN based on their duration.
- L2 Relay UE does not support using the same i_s as for RRC_IDLE state.

Example snippet: "In RRC_IDLE state, if eDRX is configured by upper layers, i.e., TeDRX, CN, according to clause 7.4..."

2. TDoc R2-2303115: Start of Change 5.8.9.10 Notification Message
- This procedure is used by a U2N Relay UE to send notification to the connected U2N Remote UE.

Example snippet: "This procedure is used by a U2N Relay UE to send notification to the connected U2N Remote UE."

3. TDoc R2-2303175:
- Configure lower layers to perform the sidelink resource allocation mode 1 or mode 2 for NR sidelink discovery transmission.
- If T311 is running, release the resources indicated by rrc-ConfiguredSidelinkGrant (if any).
- Perform the unified access control procedure using the Access Category and Access Identities provided by upper layers.

Example snippet: "if T311 is running, configure the lower layers to release the resources indicated by rrc-ConfiguredSidelinkGrant (if any);"

4. TDoc R2-2303176:
- Consider the reportQuantityRelay as the sorting quantity for a candidate L2 U2N Relay UE.

Example snippet: "2> for a candidate L2 U2N Relay UE, consider the reportQuantityRelay as the sorting quantity;"

5. TDoc R2-2303337:
- No specific technical difference mentioned.

6. TDoc R2-2303338:
- Perform the unified access control procedure using the Access Category and Access Identities provided by upper layers.
- Release wlanNameList from the UE Inactive.

Example snippet: "2> if the upper layers provide an Access Category and one or more Access Identities: 3> perform the unified access control procedure as specified in 5.3.14 using the Access Category and Access Identities provided by upper layers;"

7. TDoc R2-2303386:
- Apply default configurations of SL-RLC1, PDCP, and SRAP for SRB1 mapping.
- RRCReestablishment is unable to override the default SRAP configuration and UE will continue to use SL-RLC1 as egress PC5 Relay RLC channel for SRB1.

Example snippet: "Hence, based on the above discussion, we can conclude that the L2 U2N remote UE will continue to use SL-RLC1 for SRB1 mapping even after receiving the RRCReestablishment."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303385 (Apple) R2-2303739 (Philips International B.V.) R2-2303922 (ASUSTeK) R2-2304066 (Ericsson España S.A.)

TDoc R2-2303385:
- If the RRCRelease message includes the cellReselectionPriorities, store the cell reselection priority information provided.
- If the t320 is included, start timer T320 with the timer value set according to the value of t320.
- If deprioritisationReq is included and the UE supports RRC connection release with deprioritisation, start or restart timer T325 with the timer value set to the deprioritisationTimer signalled and store the deprioritisationReq until T325 expiry.
- For SRB2 (if it is resumed) and for SRB1, trigger the PDCP entity to perform SDU discard as specified in TS 38.323.

TDoc R2-2303739:
- Configure the parameters to SRAP entity in accordance with the sl-SRAP-ConfigRemote.
- If SRB1 is included in sl-MappingToAddModList and sl-EgressRLC-ChannelPC5 is configured, release SL-RLC1 if established and associate the PC5 Relay RLC channel as indicated by sl-EgressRLC-ChannelPC5 with SRB1.
- If SRB1 is not included in sl-MappingToAddModList or SRB1 is included in sl-MappingToAddModList but sl-EgressRLC-ChannelPC5 is not configured, apply the default configuration of SL-RLC1 as specified in clause 9.2.4 and associate it with the SRB1.
- If the sl-L2RemoteUE-Config contains the sl-UEIdentityRemote, use the value of the sl-UEIdentityRemote as the C-RNTI in the PCell.
- If is set to release, release the relay operation related configurations.

TDoc R2-2303922:
- If the UE is acting as L2 U2N Remote UE, use values for timers T300, T301, and T319 as included in the ue-TimersAndConstantsRemoteUE received in SIB12 if it is included; otherwise, use values for timers T300, T301, and T319 as included in the ue-TimersAndConstants received in SIB1.
- Perform the sidelink UE information for NR sidelink communication procedure, as specified in 5.8.3.3; it is up to UE implementation on whether and how to indicate to upper layers to maintain the keep-alive procedure.

TDoc R2-2304066:
- If the UE is acting as L2 U2N Remote UE, use values for timers T300, T301, and T319 as included in the ue-TimersAndConstantsRemoteUE received in SIB12 if it is included; otherwise, use values for timers T300, T301, and T319 as included in the ue-TimersAndConstants received in SIB1.
- If sl-DRX-ConfigCommonGC-BC is included in SIB12-IEs, store the NR sidelink DRX configuration and configure lower layers to perform sidelink DRX operation for groupcast and broadcast as specified in TS 38.321.
- The UE should discard any stored segments for SIB12 upon cell (re-)selection.

(TDoc R2-2303385) Example snippet: "if the deprioritisationReq is included and the UE supports RRC connection release with deprioritisation: start or restart timer T325 with the timer value set to the deprioritisationTimer signalled; store the deprioritisationReq until T325 expiry."

(TDoc R2-2303739) Example snippet: "if SRB1 is included in sl-MappingToAddModList and sl-EgressRLC-ChannelPC5 is configured: release SL-RLC1 if established; associate the PC5 Relay RLC channel as indicated by sl-EgressRLC-ChannelPC5 with SRB1."

(TDoc R2-2304066) Example snippet: "If the UE is acting as L2 U2N Remote UE: If the ue-TimersAndConstantsRemoteUE is included in SIB12: use values for timers T300, T301 and T319 as included in the ue-TimersAndConstantsRemoteUE received in SIB12."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302593 (Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd) R2-2302594 (Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd)

- TDoc R2-2302593 defines the IE (Information Element) "UuMessageTransferSidelink-v17xx-IEs" with the optional field "sl-PagingDelivery-v17xx" and the sequence "sl-PagingRecord" with fields "ue-Identity", "accessType", and "pagingCause-r17".
- The L2 U2N Relay UE includes "sl-PagingDelivery-v17xx" in UuMessageTransferSidelink instead of "sl-PagingDelivery-r17" if it receives paging cause for the L2 U2N Remote UE in the paging message from gNB.
- TDoc R2-2302594 defines the message "UuMessageTransferSidelink-r17" with the choice "criticalExtensions" containing "uuMessageTransferSidelink-r17-IEs" and optional fields "criticalExtensionsFuture", "sl-SIB1-Delivery-r17", "sl-SystemInformationDelivery-r17", "lateNonCriticalExtension", and "nonCriticalExtension".
- "UuMessageTransferSidelink-r17-IEs" defines the field "sl-PagingDelivery-r17" with the "PagingRecord" content.
- The proposed ASN.1 change for "UuMessageTransferSidelink-r17-IEs" is to add "PagingRecord-v1700" and use "UuMessageTransferSidelink-r17dummy" as a placeholder for "sl-PagingDelivery-r17".
- The UE identity in "sl-PagingRecord" is mandatory, while the access type and paging cause are optional.

Example snippets from the original TDoc:

- "sl-PagingDelivery-v17xx OCTET STRING (CONTAINING sl-PagingRecord) OPTIONAL" (TDoc R2-2302593)
- "If L2 U2N Relay UE receives paging cause for the L2 U2N Remote UE in paging message received from gNB, it includes sl-PagingDelivery-v17xx in UuMessageTransferSidelink instead of sl-PagingDelivery-r17." (TDoc R2-2302593)
- "UuMessageTransferSidelink-r17-IEs ::= SEQUENCE { sl-PagingDelivery-r17 OCTET STRING (CONTAINING PagingRecord)" (TDoc R2-2302594)
- "The proposed ASN.1 change for 'UuMessageTransferSidelink-r17-IEs' is to add 'PagingRecord-v1700' in UuMessageTransferSidelink message." (TDoc R2-2302594)
- "sl-PagingRecord ::= SEQUENCE { ue-Identity PagingUE-Identity, accessType ENUMERATED {non3GPP} OPTIONAL, pagingCause-r17 ENUMERATED {voice} OPTIONAL" (TDoc R2-2302593)

TDoc comparison: R2-2303489 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303656 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303983 (Xiaomi) R2-2304189 (Huawei)

Technical differences highlighted in TDoc R2-2303489:

- NR sidelink communication for in-coverage and out-of-coverage UE
- SL DRX configuration for in-coverage and out-of-coverage UE
- Inter-UE coordination (IUC) information configuration for in-coverage and out-of-coverage UE
- NR sidelink relay discovery

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303489 to support the differences:

- "When UE is in-coverage for sidelink operation as defined in clause 8.2, the UE may perform NR sidelink communication according to SIB12, and when out-of-coverage for sidelink, the UE may perform NR sidelink communication according to SL-V2X-PreconfigurationNR or according to SIB12 of the cell on the frequency which provides inter-carrier NR sidelink configuration, as specified in TS 38.331"
- "For NR sidelink broadcast and groupcast, the UE may obtain SL DRX configuration from SIB12 (for in-coverage UE, as defined in clause 8.2, in RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE state) or SL-PreconfigurationNR (for UE out-of-coverage)"
- "The U2N Remote UE, the U2N Relay UE, or both may transmit NR sidelink relay discovery (i.e., as specified in TS 23.304"
- "For inter-UE coordination (IUC) information configuration, the UE may obtain it from SIB12 (for in-coverage UE, as defined in clause 8.2, in RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE state) or SL-PreconfigurationNR (for UE out-of-coverage)"

Technical differences highlighted in TDoc R2-2303656:

- Initiation of NR sidelink communication, discovery, and U2N relay operation in RRC_CONNECTED state
- Reporting sidelink DRX assistance information or sidelink DRX configuration reject information during sidelink unicast transmission

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303656 to support the differences:

- "A UE capable of NR sidelink communication or NR sidelink discovery or NR sidelink U2N relay operation that is in RRC_CONNECTED may initiate the procedure to indicate it is (interested in) receiving or transmitting NR sidelink communication or NR sidelink discovery or NR sidelink U2N relay operation in several cases including upon successful connection establishment or resuming, upon change of interest, upon changing QoS profile(s), upon receiving UECapabilityInformationSidelink from the associated peer UE, upon RLC mode information updated from the associated peer UE or upon change to a PCell providing SIB12 including sl-ConfigCommonNR."
- "A UE capable of NR sidelink communication that is configured with sl-ScheduledConfig and is performing sidelink unicast transmission may initiate the procedure to report the sidelink DRX assistance information or the sidelink DRX configuration reject information received from the associated peer UE, upon receiving either of them from the associated peer UE."

Technical differences highlighted in TDoc R2-2303983:

- Barring of cells based on various conditions such as intraFreqReselectionRedCap, cellBarredRedCap1Rx, cellBarredRedCap2Rx, and halfDuplexRedCapAllowed
- Barring of cells for IAB-MT UE based on iab-Support availability

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303983 to support the differences:

- "perform barring as if intraFreqReselectionRedCap is set to allowed; else: if the cellBarredRedCap1Rx is present in the acquired SIB1 and is set to barred and the UE is equipped with 1 Rx branch; or if the cellBarredRedCap2Rx is present in the acquired SIB1 and is set to barred and the UE is equipped with 2 Rx branches; or if the halfDuplexRedCapAllowed is not present in the acquired SIB1 and the UE supports only half-duplex FDD operation: consider the cell as barred in accordance with TS 38.304; else if UE is IAB-MT and if iab-Support is not provided for the selected PLMN nor the registered PLMN nor PLMN of the equivalent PLMN list nor the selected SNPN nor the registered SNPN:"
- "consider the cell as barred in accordance with TS 38.304 and perform barring as if intraFreqReselection, or intraFreqReselectionRedCap for RedCap UEs, is set to notAllowed;"

Technical differences highlighted in TDoc R2-2304189:

- Various proposals related to RRC miscellaneous CRs, including adding separations between conditional "or"s and removing field descriptions
- Confirmation that forwarding paging cause by L2 U2N Relay UE is not supported in Rel-17
- Agreement on a CR related to TS 38.304

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2304189 to support the differences:

- "Proposal 11: The first change of adding separations between conditional “or”s in R2-2303656 is agreeable and can be merged into RRC miscellaneous CR."
- "Conclusion Proposal 1: RAN2 confirm that forwarding paging cause by L2 U2N Relay UE is not supported in Rel-17. Proposal 10: The 38.304 CR in R2-2303489 is agreeable."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.5.3 : User plane corrections
Entity SRAP Layer Services Max Data Field Size SRAP for SL Relay User Plane Corrections
Huawei, HiSilicon [R2-2303490] Clarification on services expected from SRAP layer
Huawei, HiSilicon [R2-2303491] Max Data field size for L2 U2N relay; Granularity of 1 byte; Max size of PDCP PDU
NEC [R2-2304036] Corrections on SRAP for SL relay; Egress RLC channel determination; SRAP Data PDU for SRB0 and sl-SRAP-ConfigRemote
Samsung [R2-2304191] Summary of agenda item 6.5.3; User plane corrections; Discussion & Decision










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.6.1 : General and Stage 2 corrections
Entity NTN Stage-2 Correction Scheduling and Timing Propagation Delay Common Timing Advance (Common TA) Scheduling Offsets Round Trip Time (RTT) Reference Point (RP) Measurements
OPPO, Ericsson, Thales R2-2302540 Enhanced timing relationships [R2-2302540] Accommodate in NTNs [R2-2302540] Enhances timing relationships [R2-2302540] Configured offset to RTT [R2-2302540] Between RP and NTN payload [R2-2302540]    
THALES R2-2302654, R2-2302765 Enhanced timing relationships [R2-2302654, R2-2302765] Accommodate in NTNs [R2-2302654, R2-2302765] Enhances timing relationships [R2-2302654, R2-2302765] Configured offset to RTT [R2-2302654, R2-2302765] Between Reference Point and NTN payload [R2-2302654, R2-2302765]    
Samsung R2-2303764             Same principle as 9.2.4, multiple SMTCs, measurement gaps, assistance info in SIB19 [R2-2303764]










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.6.2 : UP corrections
Concept Apple (R2-2303413) CATT, Turkcell, Huawei, HiSilicon, Quectel, CAICT (R2-2303820) Ericsson (R2-2303833) Huawei, HiSilicon (R2-2303960) Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell (R2-2303979)
UL Synchronization Maintenance, MAC entity, Serving Cell, uplink synchronization, upper layers (R2-2303413)
HARQ process Transmission, TBs, HARQ information, NDI, broadcast process, MCCH-RNTI, G-RNTI, MBS broadcast (R2-2303820)
NR NTN Corrections, 38.321 (R2-2303820) R17, HARQ mode, definition, Dormant BWP (R2-2303833) UE behaviour, SR, RACH, validity timer, assistance information, SIB19 (R2-2303960) MAC procedure, Random Access procedure, PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER, PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER (R2-2303979)
Validity timer Expires, SIB19 (R2-2303960) Expiry, Random Access procedure, PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER, PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER (R2-2303979)
UE behaviour SR, RACH, validity timer expires (R2-2303960)
Random Access procedure 5.1, PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER, PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER, LBT failure indication, SSB, CSI-RS (R2-2303979)
Assistance information SIB19, validity timer (R2-2303960)


TDoc comparison: R2-2303820 (CATT, Turkcell, Huawei, HiSilicon, Quectel, CAICT) R2-2303979 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

Technical Differences between TDoc R2-2303820 and TDoc R2-2303979:

1. The first TDoc describes the conditions for configuring downlink assignments for MBS multicast and NACK only HARQ feedback, while the second TDoc describes the conditions for the Random Access procedure initiated for beam failure recovery of both BFD-RS sets of SpCell.

Example from TDoc R2-2303820: If the HARQ process is associated with a transmission indicated with a G-RNTI or a G-CS-RNTI or a configured downlink assignment for MBS multicast and NACK only HARQ feedback is configured for this G-RNTI or G-CS-RNTI and the data for this TB is successfully decoded and the transmission is not the first transmission of PDSCH where the configured downlink assignment was (re-)initialised.

Example from TDoc R2-2303979: Else if the Random Access procedure was initiated for beam failure recovery of both BFD-RS sets of SpCell: indicate to the Multiplexing and assembly entity to include an Enhanced BFR MAC CE or a Truncated Enhanced BFR MAC CE in the subsequent uplink transmission.

2. The first TDoc describes the conditions for disabling HARQ feedback, while the second TDoc describes the conditions for subsequent new transmission after initial new transmission for the CG-SDT with CCCH message.

Example from TDoc R2-2303820: If the HARQ process is configured with disabled HARQ feedback: if harq-FeedbackEnablingforSPSactive is configured with enabled and the transmission is the first transmission after activation of the configured downlink assignment: instruct the physical layer to generate acknowledgement(s) of the data in this TB.

Example from TDoc R2-2303979: If the configured uplink grant is for the initial transmission for the CG-SDT with CCCH message (i.e., initial new transmission); or if the configuredGrantTimer is not running or not configured, and PDCCH addressed to the MAC entity's C-RNTI has been received after the initial transmission of the CG-SDT with CCCH message (i.e., subsequent new transmission): consider the NDI bit to have been toggled; deliver the configured uplink grant and the associated HARQ information to the HARQ entity.

3. The first TDoc describes the conditions for stopping or expiring the timeAlignmentTimer, while the second TDoc describes the conditions for the configured uplink grant.

Example from TDoc R2-2303820: If the timeAlignmentTimer, associated with the TAG containing the Serving Cell on which the HARQ feedback is to be transmitted, is stopped or expired and if the cg-SDT-TimeAlignmentTimer, if configured, is not running.

Example from TDoc R2-2303979: If the configured uplink grant is for the initial transmission for the CG-SDT with CCCH message (i.e., initial new transmission); or if the configuredGrantTimer is not running or not configured, and PDCCH addressed to the MAC entity's C-RNTI has been received after the initial transmission of the CG-SDT with CCCH message (i.e., subsequent new transmission): consider the NDI bit to have been toggled; deliver the configured uplink grant and the associated HARQ information to the HARQ entity.

4. The first TDoc describes the conditions for the first transmission of PDSCH where the configured downlink assignment was (re-)initialised, while the second TDoc describes the conditions for the Random Access procedure initiated for beam failure recovery of both BFD-RS sets of SpCell.

Example from TDoc R2-2303820: If the HARQ process is associated with a transmission indicated with a G-RNTI or a G-CS-RNTI or a configured downlink assignment for MBS multicast and NACK only HARQ feedback is configured for this G-RNTI or G-CS-RNTI and the data for this TB is successfully decoded and the transmission is not the first transmission of PDSCH where the configured downlink assignment was (re-)initialised.

Example from TDoc R2-2303979: Else if the Random Access procedure was initiated for beam failure recovery of both BFD-RS sets of SpCell: indicate to the Multiplexing and assembly entity to include an Enhanced BFR MAC CE or a Truncated Enhanced BFR MAC CE in the subsequent uplink transmission.









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.6.3 : CP corrections
Entity NR NTN UE capabilities kmac definition UE capability support in TN and NTN T

TDoc comparison: R2-2302693 (Intel Corporation) R2-2303034 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2303035 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2303096 (Huawei, HiSilicon, Google) R2-2303164 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

TDoc R2-2302693:
- Change in BandNR parameters in section 4.2.7.2
- Changes in RRM measurement features in section 5.6

Example snippet: "4.2.7.2 BandNR parameters"

TDoc R2-2303034:
- Inclusion of feature sets into featureSetsEUTRA in UE-EUTRA-Capability in section 2
- Inclusion of received frequencyBandListFilter in the field appliedFreqBandListFilter of the requested UE capability in section 1
- Removal of the band combination from the list of "candidate band combinations" in section 3

Example snippet: "1> include the received frequencyBandListFilter in the field appliedFreqBandListFilter of the requested UE capability"

TDoc R2-2303035:
- Addition of nonCriticalExtension field in IDC-Assistance-r16 in section 1
- Addition of ReducedAggregatedBandwidth-r17 in section 2

Example snippet: "ReducedAggregatedBandwidth-r17 ::= ENUMERATED {mhz0, mhz100, mhz200, mhz400, mhz800, mhz1200, mhz1600, mhz2000}"

TDoc R2-2303096:
- Indication of traffic characteristic of sidelink logical channels in sl-UE-AssistanceInformationNR in section 1

Example snippet: "sl-UE-AssistanceInformationNR Indicates the traffic characteristic of sidelink logical channel(s), specified in the IE SL-TrafficPatternInfo"

TDoc R2-2303164:
- Need for R measDurationSymbols-v1700, ref-SCS-CP-v1700, and tci-StateInfo-r17 in section 1
- Addition of ref-BWPId-r17 in section 2

Example snippet: "measDurationSymbols-v1700 ENUMERATED {sym140, sym560, sym1120} OPTIONAL"

TDoc comparison: R2-2303460 (vivo) R2-2303675 (MediaTek) R2-2303765 (Samsung) R2-2303819 (CATT)

1. RLC-BearerConfig information element:
- Defines the logical channel identity and the type of radio bearer used.
- Can include RLC configuration and MAC logical channel configuration.
- Supports reestablishment of RLC.
- Example snippet: servedRadioBearer CHOICE { srb-Identity SRB-Identity, drb-Identity DRB-Identity }

2. FrequencyInfoUL-SIB:
- Provides basic parameters of an uplink carrier and transmission.
- Includes optional parameters such as additional spectrum emission and frequency shift.
- Example snippet: scs-SpecificCarrierList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSCSs)) OF SCS-SpecificCarrier

3. ARFCN-ValueNR:
- Indicates the ARFCN for a downlink, uplink or bi-directional NR global frequency raster.
- Defined in TS 38.101-1 [15] TS 38.101-2 [39], clause 5.4.2.
- Example snippet: absoluteFrequencyPointA ARFCN-ValueNR OPTIONAL

4. IntraFreqNeighCellInfo:
- Provides information about neighboring cells in the same frequency band.
- Includes parameters such as physical cell ID and q-offset range.
- Supports SSB position QCL relation and Q-RxLevMinOffsetCell.
- Example snippet: physCellId PhysCellId, q-OffsetCell Q-OffsetRange

5. InterFreqCarrierFreqInfo:
- Defines the carrier frequency for inter-frequency cells.
- Includes optional parameters such as frequency band list.
- Example snippet: dl-CarrierFreq ARFCN-ValueNR, frequencyBandList MultiFrequencyBandListNR-SIB OPTIONAL

6. MeasReportQuantityCLI-r16:
- Indicates the measurement report quantity for CLI.
- Can be SRS-RSRP or CLI-RSSI.
- Example snippet: MeasReportQuantityCLI-r16 ::= ENUMERATED {srs-rsrp, cli-rssi}

7. MeasResultCellListSFTD-NR:
- Consists of SFN and radio frame boundary difference between the PCell and an NR cell.
- Includes hysteresis and time to trigger.
- Supports A4 and A5 threshold.
- Example snippet: timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger, hysteresis Hysteresis

Example snippets:
- "servedRadioBearer CHOICE { srb-Identity SRB-Identity, drb-Identity DRB-Identity }"
- "absoluteFrequencyPointA ARFCN-ValueNR OPTIONAL"
- "scs-SpecificCarrierList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSCSs)) OF SCS-SpecificCarrier"
- "physCellId PhysCellId, q-OffsetCell Q-OffsetRange"
- "dl-CarrierFreq ARFCN-ValueNR, frequencyBandList MultiFrequencyBandListNR-SIB OPTIONAL"
- "MeasReportQuantityCLI-r16 ::= ENUMERATED {srs-rsrp, cli-rssi}"
- "timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger, hysteresis Hysteresis"

TDoc comparison: R2-2303461 (vivo) R2-2303785 (Ericsson) R2-2303923 (ASUSTeK, Samsung, Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303924 (ASUSTeK)

Technical Differences Among TDocs:

1. TDoc R2-2303461: Defines variables such as Ml1, Ml2, Hys, Thresh1, and Thresh2 for distance calculations in reportConfigNR.
Example: "Ml1 is the distance between UE and a reference location for this event (i.e. referenceLocation1 as defined within reportConfigNR for this event), not taking into account any offsets."

2. TDoc R2-2303785: Instructs UE to start or restart T430 upon receiving SIB19 for serving cell with the timer value set to ntn-UlSyncValidityDuration for the serving cell from the subframe indicated by epochTime for the serving cell.
Example: "1> start or restart T430 for serving cell with the timer value set to ntn-UlSyncValidityDuration for the serving cell from the subframe indicated by epochTime for the serving cell."

3. TDoc R2-2303923: Establishes RLC entity and logical channel for target cell group, suspends SRBs for source cell group, and applies newUE-Identity as the C-RNTI in the target cell group.
Example: "3> for each SRB: 4> establish an RLC entity for the target cell group, with the same configurations as for the source cell group;"

4. TDoc R2-2303924: Instructs UE to store the acquired MIB and perform cell re-selection to other cells on the same frequency as the barred cell as specified in TS 38.304 if cellBarred in the acquired MIB is set to barred.
Example: "2> if the cellBarred in the acquired MIB is set to barred: 3> if the UE is a RedCap UE and ssb-SubcarrierOffset indicates SIB1 is transmitted in the cell (TS 38.213 [20]; 3> perform cell re-selection to other cells on the same frequency as the barred cell as specified in TS 38.304 [13])."

Overall, these TDocs differ in terms of the variables defined, instructions for UE actions upon receiving certain signals, and configuration of lower layers for target SpCell.

TDoc comparison: R2-2302868 (Intel Corporation) R2-2303296 (Google Inc.) R2-2303412 (Apple) R2-2303671 (MediaTek)

• Legacy 38.331 defines UE behavior in case of configuration failure during reconfiguration or inability to comply with RRCResume configuration.
Example: "if UE cannot comply with a configuration provided to UE for: case 1) during reconfiguration (defined as a failure in Reconfiguration message), UE shall initiate reestablishment procedure."

• RAN2 specification should be updated to ignore corresponding configuration if a UE in RRC_INACTIVE moves to a new cell that does not support the corresponding features.
Proposal: "When a UE in RRC_INACTIVE is configured with SDT and eDRX and moves to a new cell in which the UE does not support the corresponding features, RAN2 specification should be updated to ignore (i.e., consider as not configured) the corresponding configuration already available in UE."

• SnonIntraSearchQ defines the behavior of UE in terms of measurement initiation and priority for NR inter-frequency or inter-RAT frequency cells based on distanceThresh and referenceLocation.
Example: "If the distance between UE and the serving cell reference location referenceLocation is shorter than distanceThresh, the UE may choose not to perform measurements of NR inter-frequency cells of equal or lower priority, or inter-RAT frequency cells of lower priority."

• There is no restriction on the relationship between SMTC configuration and satellite. One-to-one association between SMTC and satellite is proposed for IDLE/INACTIVE UE to perform SMTC adjustment correctly.
Example: "In order for IDLE/INACTIVE UE to perform the SMTC adjustment correctly, the simple way is to introduce the restriction on one-to-one association between SMTC and satellite."

• Online, 17th - 26th April, 2023, first change 4 UE radio access capability parameters, including supported max data rate for DL/UL for NR and the computing formula for data rate.
Example: "For NR, the approximate data rate for a given number of aggregated carriers in a band or band combination is computed as follows. Data rate (in Mbps) = wherein J is the number of aggregated EUTRA component carriers in MR-DC band combination is the total maximum number of DL-SCH transport block bits received or the total maximum number of UL-SCH transport block bits transmitted, within a 1ms TTI for j-th CC, as derived from TS36.213 [19] based on the UE supported maximum MIMO layers for the j-th CC, and based on the maximum modulation order for the j-th CC and number of PRBs based on the bandwidth of the j-th CC according to indicated UE capabilities."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.7.1 : General and stage 2 corrections
Entity GNSS Integrity Requirements Timing Error Margin NR E-CID Deactivation of MG Gap and PPW UE Positioning Assistance Information Information Transfer from gNB to LMF UL-AoA Protection Level and Target Integrity Risk
CT4 [R2-2302404] Implementing GNSS integrity requirements; Time-to-Alert (TTA), Target Integrity Risk (TIR), Alert Limit (AL); TS 23.273 [SA2 CR S2-2300953]
RAN4 [R2-2302429] Reply LS on applicability of timing error margin of Rx TEG; R4-2218006 (R2-2210977); Rel-17 Work Item: NR_pos_enh-Core
CATT [R2-2302637] Miscellaneous corrections on 38.305; LMF-initiated Location Information Transfer from UE; NR E-CID method
Intel Corporation [R2-2302744] Stage 2 procedure for deactivation of MG gap and PPW; Pre-configured Measurement Gap; NR DL-PRS measurements
Huawei, HiSilicon [R2-2302993] Correction to UEPositioningAssistanceInformation; UE Positioning Assistance Information for UL-TDOA
Ericsson [R2-2304052] Update of information transfer from gNB to LMF; assistance data listed in Table 8.10.2.3-1
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [R2-2304053] Measurements and Assistance Data Transfer; UL-AoA positioning method; A-AoA and Z-AoA at multiple RPs
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [R2-2304054] Protection Level and Target Integrity Risk; definitions given in TR 21.905 [1]
Huawei, HiSilicon, Ericsson [R2-2304178] Reply LS on GNSS integrity requirements parameters; R2-2213320 and R2-2302404; enquiring about range of parameters


TDoc comparison: R2-2304053 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2304054 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

- TDoc R2-2304053 covers Multi-RTT Positioning Procedures and DL-AoD Positioning Procedures.
- 8.10.3.1.2.1 Assistance Data Transfer between LMF and UE is specific to Multi-RTT Positioning Procedures.
- Pre-configured DL-PRS assistance data may consist of multiple instances, where each instance is applicable to a different area within the network. This is applicable to both Multi-RTT and DL-AoD Positioning Procedures.
- TDoc R2-2304054 covers the calibration/compensation of the relative time delay between different RF chains in the same TRP/UE and may also possibly consider the offset of the Tx/Rx antenna phase centre to the physical antenna centre.
- Pre-configured DL-PRS assistance data may consist of multiple instances, where each instance is applicable to a different area within the network.
- Positioning integrity is a measure of the trust in the accuracy of the position-related data and the ability to provide associated alerts.
- Rx Timing Error is not specifically mentioned in either TDoc, but may be a factor in both Multi-RTT and DL-AoD Positioning Procedures.

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2304053:
- "8.10.3.1.2.1 Assistance Data Transfer between LMF and UE"
- "Pre-configured DL-PRS assistance data may consist of multiple instances, where each instance is applicable to a different area within the network."
- "8.11.3 DL-AoD Positioning Procedures"

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2304054:
- "The calibration/compensation may also include the calibration/compensation of the relative time delay between different RF chains in the same TRP/UE and may also possibly consider the offset of the Tx antenna phase centre to the physical antenna centre."
- "Pre-configured DL-PRS assistance data may consist of multiple instances, where each instance is applicable to a different area within the network."
- "Positioning integrity"
- "Rx Timing Error" (not specifically mentioned in the TDoc, but relevant to the topic)

TDoc comparison: R2-2302404 (CT4) R2-2302429 (RAN4) R2-2304178 (Huawei, HiSilicon, Ericsson)

TDoc R2-2302404:

- CT4 is implementing GNSS integrity requirements as agreed in SA2 CR S2-2300953.
- There is no clear data structure definition of TTA, TIR, and AL in TS 38.305, which prevents CT4 from implementing this feature.
- CT4 asks RAN2 to define the data structure of TTA, TIR, and AL and provide the related reference to CT4 for implementation.
- Definitions of TTA, TIR, and AL are specified in TS 38.305 [9].

TDoc R2-2302429:

- RAN4 thanks RAN2 for the LS R4-2218006 on the applicability of timing error margin of Rx TEG.
- RAN4 discussed the issues and provided reply LS R4-2220729.
- RAN4 kindly asks RAN2 to take the above information into account in the following work on NR positioning enhancements.

TDoc R2-2304178:

- LS R2-2213320 was sent to SA2 for the parameters sent between LCS client/UE/AF and LMF.
- During the discussion in R2#120, the contribution proposed adding the AD for alert limit and time to alert, with proposed TP.
- The data structure of the contribution above can be taken as the baseline for the discussion on the reply LS to CT4.
- Proposal: Adopt the values for Alert Limit and Time to Alert in R2-2212892 as the baseline for the data structure of TIR and AL.

Example snippets from the original TDoc to support the difference highlighting:

- TDoc R2-2302404: "However, there is no clear data structure definition of TTA, TIR, and AL in TS 38.305, CT4 could not implement this feature based on current definition."
- TDoc R2-2302429: "RAN4 thanks RAN2 for the LS R4-2218006 (R2-2210977) on applicability of timing error margin of Rx TEG."
- TDoc R2-2304178: "During R2#120 meeting, LS R2-2213320 has been sent to SA2 for the parameters sent between LCS client/UE/AF and LMF."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302637 (CATT) R2-2302744 (Intel Corporation) R2-2304052 (Ericsson)

- TDoc R2-2302637:
- NR Enhanced cell ID positioning method
- LMF-initiated Location Information Transfer from UE
- DL-TDOA positioning
- UE sends LPP Provide Location Information message to LMF
- PRS processing window configuration
- Measurement gap configuration
- LMF provides PRS information of neighbor TRPs to serving gNB
- TDoc R2-2302744:
- Pre-configure UE with PRS processing window
- Pre-configure UE with measurement gap
- LMF provides PRS information of neighbor TRPs to serving gNB
- TDoc R2-2304052:
- Assistance data transferred from gNB to LMF
- UL-SRS configuration information requested by LMF from serving gNB
- Table 8.10.2.3-1 lists assistance data that may be transferred from gNB to LMF
- Table 8.13.2.0-1 lists assistance data that may be transferred from gNB to LMF
- Figure 8.13.3.2.1-1 shows UL information Delivery operation from serving gNB to LMF

Examples from TDoc R2-2302637:
- "Figure 8.9.3.3-1 shows the Location Information Transfer operations for the NR E-CID method from UE when the procedure is initiated by the LMF."
- "The UE sends an LPP Provide Location Information message to the LMF and reports the requested measurements that are available in the UE."
- "This request includes the NR E-CID measurements requested by the LMF and supported by the UE as listed in Table 8.9.2.2-1 together with a required response time."

Examples from TDoc R2-2302744:
- "The serving gNB decides to pre-configure the UE with PRS processing window and provides pre-configured PRS processing window configuration(s) with associated ID(s) to the UE by sending RRC Reconfiguration message specified in TS 38.331."
- "The serving gNB decides to pre-configure the UE with measurement gap and provides pre-configured measurement gap configuration(s) with associated ID(s) to the UE by sending RRC Reconfiguration message specified in TS 38.331."
- "The LMF provides the PRS information of the neighbour TRPs to the serving gNB and requests the serving gNB to configure the UE with measurement pre-configurations via NRPPa MEASUREMENT PRECONFIGURATION REQUIRED message."

Examples from TDoc R2-2304052:
- "Table 8.10.2.3-1: Assistance data that may be transferred from gNB to the LMF."
- "The configuration data for a target UE that may be transferred from the serving gNB to the LMF is listed in Table 8.10.2.3-2."
- "Figure 8.13.3.2.1-1 shows the UL information Delivery operation from the serving gNB to the LMF."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.7.2 : RRC corrections
Concept CATT [Ref R2-2302638] Huawei, HiSilicon [Ref R2-2302992]
UE Positioning Assistance Information procedure Used by UE to report the UE Positioning Assistance Information, corrections on figure Used by UE to report the UE Positioning Assistance Information, correction to UE positioning assistance information
3GPP TSG-RAN2 Meeting Meeting #121-bis, electronic, April 17-26, 2023 Meeting #121bis, online, April 17-26, 2023
Figure 5.7.14.1-1 UE Positioning Assistance Information procedure UE Positioning Assistance Information procedure
5.7.14 UE Positioning Assistance Information 5.7.14.1 General 5.7.14.1 General
Change START OF CHANGE CHANGE BEGINS










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.7.3 : LPP corrections
Entity Timing Error Margin (RxTEG) Miscellaneous Corrections (LPP) PRS Validity Area Sub 1s Location Information Reporting Periodicity Finer Periodicities Than 1s LOS-NLOS-Indicator Types Use of nr-DL-PRS-ExpectedAoD-or-AoA Assistance by UE
CATT [Ref R2-2302639] NR-Multi-RTT-SignalMeasurementInformation, target device, location server, 3GPP TSG-RAN2 Meeting
Lenovo [Ref R2-2302884] Common Positioning, CommonIEsProvideAssistanceData, 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting, ASN1START, ASN1STOP
Huawei, HiSilicon [Ref R2-2302987] LPP Provide Assistance Data, target device, upper layers, 3GPP TSG-RAN2 Meeting
Ericsson [Ref R2-2304050] Rel 17 positioning enhancements, LPP, millisecond accuracy, 10 milliseconds resolution, 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2
Ericsson [Ref R2-2304051] Common Lower-Level IEs, PeriodicAssistanceDataControlParameters, 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting, clauses 5.2.1a, 5.2.2a
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [Ref R2-2304056] LOS-NLOS-Indicator, Line-of-Sight, ASN1START, ASN1STOP, LOS-NLOS-IndicatorType1, 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [Ref R2-2304139] NR-DL-PRS-AssistanceData, location server, DL-PRS assistance data, target device, 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting
Qualcomm Incorporated [Ref R2-2304192]


TDoc comparison: R2-2302884 (Lenovo) R2-2304051 (Ericsson) R2-2304056 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

• The TDoc defines multiple Information Elements (IEs) including nr-AssistanceAvailability-r16, nr-DL-AoD-ReportConfig-r16, multiMeasInSameReport-r17, NR-DL-PRS-ProcessingCapability, NR-On-Demand-DL-PRS-Configurations, GNSS-SupportList, GNSS-SupportElement, adr-Support, velocityMeasurementSupport, TBS-ProvideCapabilities-r13, NR-DL-TDOA-ProvideCapabilities-r16, NR-DL-AoD-ProvideCapabilities-r16, LOS-NLOS-IndicatorType1-r17, LOS-NLOS-IndicatorType2, and LOS-NLOS-Indicator-r17.
• The IE multiMeasInSameReport-r17 specifies a set of possible DL-PRS configurations that can be requested on-demand by the target device.
• The IE GNSS-SupportList is a sequence of up to 16 GNSS-SupportElement IEs that provide information on GNSS capabilities.
• The IE adr-Support is a Boolean value indicating whether Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is supported.
• The IE velocityMeasurementSupport is a Boolean value indicating whether velocity measurements are supported.
• The IE TBS-ProvideCapabilities-r13 specifies the Transmission Block Size (TBS) modes supported by the device.
• The IEs NR-DL-TDOA-ProvideCapabilities-r16 and NR-DL-AoD-ProvideCapabilities-r16 specify device capabilities related to time-difference-of-arrival (TDOA) and angle-of-departure (AoD) measurements in the downlink.
• The IE LOS-NLOS-IndicatorType1-r17 provides information on the type of LOS-NLOS-Indicator.
• The IE LOS-NLOS-IndicatorType2 provides information on the LOS-NLOS-Indicator type.
• The IE LOS-NLOS-Indicator provides information on the likelihood of a Line-of-Sight (LOS) propagation path from the source to the receiver.

Example snippets from the original TDoc:
• "multiMeasInSameReport-r17 ENUMERATED { requested } OPTIONAL -- SEQUENCE { on-demand-dl-prs-configuration-list-r17 SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxOD-DL-PRS-Configs-r17)) OF On-Demand-DL-PRS-Configuration-r17" - this snippet shows the definition of the IE multiMeasInSameReport-r17 and provides an example of its usage.
• "GNSS-SupportList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..16)) OF GNSS-SupportElement" - this snippet shows the definition of the IE GNSS-SupportList and its sequence element.
• "adr-Support BOOLEAN" - this snippet shows the definition of the IE adr-Support.
• "TBS-ProvideCapabilities-r13 ::= SEQUENCE { tbs-Modes-r13 BIT STRING" - this snippet shows the definition of the IE TBS-ProvideCapabilities-r13.
• "LOS-NLOS-IndicatorType1-r17 ::= ENUMERATED { hardvalue, softvalue }" - this snippet shows the definition of the IE LOS-NLOS-IndicatorType1-r17.

TDoc comparison: R2-2304050 (Ericsson) R2-2304192 (Qualcomm Incorporated)

TDoc R2-2304050:

- The proposal is to refine the LPP periodic location information reporting interval from seconds to milliseconds.
- There is a mismatch in resolution between the scheduled location time and the periodic location information reporting interval, where the former can be configured down to milliseconds and the latter down to seconds.
- There is a mismatch in resolution between the response time and the periodic location information reporting interval, where the former can be configured down to tens of milliseconds and the latter down to seconds.
- Example snippet: "In LPP common request location information, there is a mismatch in resolution between the scheduled location time and the periodic location information reporting interval, where the former can be configured down to milliseconds and the latter down to seconds."

TDoc R2-2304192:

- "Timing Error Margins" are defined in TS 38.133 for the actual measurements only, not for maximum applicable values.
- The reference to a "maximum applicable value in TS 38.133" should be deleted from the field description for nr-UE-RxTEG-TimingErrorMargin in NR-Multi-RTT-SignalMeasurementInformation.
- Proposal 4 is to discuss and decide whether the CR in "R2-2304051, "Missing finer periodicities than 1s", Ericsson." is an essential corrections or not.
- Proposal 1 is that the CR in "R2-2302639, "Corrections on applicability of timing error margin of RxTEG in NR-Multi-RTT-SignalMeasurementInformation field descriptions", CATT" is an essential correction.
- Example snippet: "Therefore, the reference to a 'maximum applicable value in TS 38.133' should be deleted from the field description for nr-UE-RxTEG-TimingErrorMargin in NR-Multi-RTT-SignalMeasurementInformation, as proposed in the CR [1]."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302639 (CATT) R2-2304139 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

Technical Differences Between TDoc R2-2302639 and TDoc R2-2304139:

1. Purpose:
- TDoc R2-2302639: provides NR Multi-RTT measurements to the location server.
- TDoc R2-2304139: provides DL-PRS assistance data to the location server.

2. Information Elements:
- TDoc R2-2302639: NR-Multi-RTT-SignalMeasurementInformation
- TDoc R2-2304139: NR-DL-PRS-AssistanceData

3. ASN.1 Definition:
- TDoc R2-2302639:
ASN1START NR-Multi-RTT-SignalMeasurementInformation-r16 ::=
ASN1STOP
- TDoc R2-2304139:
ASN1START NR-DL-PRS-AssistanceData-r16 ::=
- The ASN.1 definition for TDoc R2-2304139 includes more details and information compared to TDoc R2-2302639.

Example Snippets from the Original TDocs:

- TDoc R2-2302639:
"The IE NR-Multi-RTT-SignalMeasurementInformation is used by the target device to provide NR Multi-RTT measurements to the location server."
- TDoc R2-2304139:
"The IE NR-DL-PRS-AssistanceData is used by the location server to provide DL-PRS assistance data."

- TDoc R2-2302639:
"6.5.12.4 NR Multi-RTT Location Information Elements – NR-Multi-RTT-SignalMeasurementInformation"
- TDoc R2-2304139:
"First Modified Subclause – NR-DL-PRS-AssistanceData"

- TDoc R2-2302639:
"ASN1START NR-Multi-RTT-SignalMeasurementInformation-r16 ::="
- TDoc R2-2304139:
"ASN1START NR-DL-PRS-AssistanceData-r16 ::="

- TDoc R2-2304139:
"The nr-DL-PRS-SFN0-Offset's and nr-DL-PRS-expectedRSTD's in nr-DL-PRS-AssistanceDataList are provided relative to the "assistance data reference" TRP."
- TDoc R2-2304139:
"NOTE 2: The nr-DL-PRS-ReferenceInfo defines the "assistance data reference" TRP whose DL-PRS configuration is included in nr-DL-PRS-AssistanceDataList."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.7.4 : MAC corrections
Entity Correction to posSRS transmission (R2-2302991) Positioning SRS transmission in RRC_INACTIVE Correction for trigger condition of Scheduling Request (R2-2304049) Positioning Measurement Gap Activation/Deactivation Request
Huawei, HiSilicon R2-2302991, RRC_INACTIVE, Periodic, Semi-persistent, Positioning SRS R2-2302991, General, Configure, RRC_INACTIVE, Transmission - -
Ericsson, OPPO - - R2-2304049, Trigger, Condition, Scheduling Request R2-2304049, Pre-configured, Positioning measurement gap, UL MAC CE, Clause 6.1.3.40










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.7.5 : UE capabilities
Entity LPP Capability FGs27-13a,14a and 14-2 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting #121bis-e R2-2302745 e-Meeting 17th April – 26th April 2023 6.4.3 Common NR Positioning Information Elements NR-DL-PRS-ProcessingCapability
Intel Corporation LPP capability for FGs27-13a,14a and 14-2 (R2-2302745) Focus on LPP capability in FGs27-13a,14a, and 14-2 (R2-2302745) Participating in 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting #121bis-e (R2-2302745) Presenting R2-2302745 e-Meeting on 17th-26th April 2023 Focus on NR Positioning Information Elements (R2-2302745) Discussing 6.4.3 Common NR Positioning Information Elements (R2-2302745) Defining common DL-PRS Processing capability (R2-2302745)










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.9.1 : Stage-2
Entity Concept 1: User Consent Concept 2: Trace Reporting Concept 3: RAN3 Concept 4: OAM Concept 5: MDT Concept 6: Packet Delay Concept 7: MR-DC Concept 8: PDCP
SA3 [R2-2302451] Allow/disallow transfer, collection information [R2-2302451] Transfer information from RAN to TCE [R2-2302451] Reply LS, user consent [R2-2302451] Provision via OAM [R2-2302451] NR_ENDC_SON_MDT_enh-Core [R2-2302451] - - -
SA5 [R2-2302460] - - LS on Excess Packet Delay Threshold [R2-2302460] - NR_ENDC_SON_MDT_enh-Core [R2-2302460] Excess Packet Delay Threshold [R2-2302460] - -
Nokia [R2-2302863] - - - - Immediate MDT Measurements [R2-2302863] - - -
Huawei [R2-2303898] - - - - - UL PDCP packet average delay [R2-2303898] Split bearer [R2-2303898] UL PDCP packet average delay measurement [R2-2303898]
HiSilicon [R2-2303899] - - - - Immediate MDT for MR-DC [R2-2303899] - MR-DC [R2-2303899] UL PDCP packet average delay [R2-2303899]


TDoc comparison: R2-2303898 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303899 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

1. Observation 1: For split bearer, either MN or SN can configure the UL PDCP packet delay (D1 measurement) to UE, and it has to be handled by network implementation. For excess delay configuration in NR-DC, the node owning the PDCP terminating point configures the UE.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303898:

- "For split bearer, either MN or SN can configure the UL PDCP packet delay (D1 measurement) to UE."
- "For excess delay configuration in NR-DC, Node owning the PDCP terminating point configures the UE."

2. Proposal 1: For the UL PDCP average delay measurement of split bearer, it is proposed RAN2 to agree that the node hosting PDCP entity can configure the measurement.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303898:

- "For the UL PDCP average delay measurement of split bearer, it is proposed RAN2 to agree that the node hosting PDCP entity can configure the measurement."

3. In signalling-based immediate MDT, MME provides MDT configuration for both MN and SN towards MN including multi-RAT SN configuration, specifically E-UTRA and NR MDT configuration. In management-based immediate MDT, OAM provides the MDT configuration to both MN and SN independently.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303899:

- "In signalling based immediate MDT, MME provides MDT configuration for both MN and SN towards MN including multi RAT SN configuration, specifically E-UTRA and NR MDT configuration."
- "In management-based immediate MDT, OAM provides the MDT configuration to both MN and SN independently."

4. For both MN and SN, management-based MDT should not overwrite signalling-based MDT.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303899:

- "For both MN and SN, Management based MDT should not overwrite signalling based MDT."

5. For split bearer, only the node configuring the measurement to UE will receive the measurement result from the UE.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303899:

- "For split bearer: only can configure the measurement to UE, and the UE reports the measurement result to corresponding node where the configuration was received from."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.9.3 : SON Corrections
Entity timeSinceCHO-Reconfig (R2-2302611) SCG Failure Scenario of MHI (R2-2302612) New Packet Loss Rate (R2-2302653) RLF Report after HO (R2-2303451) Including TAC in SHR (R2-2303452) Correction to timeSCGFailure (R2-2303646) NB-IoT UE Location Info in RLF Report (R2-2303696) UE Location Information in NB-IoT RLF Report (R2-2303717) Introduction of Packet Loss Rate with Delay Threshold (R2-2304083)
CATT Correction on timeSinceCHO-Reconfig in TS 38.331 (R2-2302611) Correction on SCG failure scenario of MHI in TS 38.331 (R2-2302612)
China Unicom Report of new packet loss rate (R2-2302653) 38.314 CR for the introduction of packet loss rate with delay threshold (R2-2304083)
Ericsson Correction to the handling of RLF-Report after successful HO (R2-2303451) On including TAC in the SHR (R2-2303452)
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell Correction to timeSCGFailure (R2-2303646)
Qualcomm Incorporated NB-IoT UE location Info in RLF report (R2-2303696) Correction on UE location information in NB-IoT RLF report (R2-2303717)


TDoc comparison: R2-2302612 (CATT) R2-2303451 (Ericsson) R2-2303452 (Ericsson)

# TDoc R2-2302612:
- Specifies how mobility history information is stored by the UE for RRC_IDLE, RRC_INACTIVE, and RRC_CONNECTED.
- Example: "This procedure specifies how the mobility history information is stored by the UE for up to N previous RRC connections (N is UE dependent), covering RRC_IDLE, RRC_INACTIVE and RRC_CONNECTED states."

# TDoc R2-2303451:
- Specifies how to set fields in VarRLF-report in case of HO failure or RLF, based on different conditions.
- Example: "If the UE supports RLF-Report for DAPS handover and if any DAPS bearer was configured while T304 was running, set lastHO-Type to daps."
- Example: "If radio link failure was detected in the source PCell, according to clause 5.3.10.3, set timeConnSourceDAPS-Failure to the time between the initiation of the DAPS handover execution and the radio link failure detected in the source."

# TDoc R2-2303452:
- Specifies how to set the measResultListNR in measResultNeighCells for neighboring cells based on CSI-RS measurements.
- Example: "If the CSI-RS measurement quantities are available, set the measResultListNR in measResultNeighCells to include all the available measurement quantities of the best measured cells, other than the source PCell and target PCell, ordered such that the cell with highest CSI-RS SINR is listed first."
- Example: "For the neighboring cells set ordered based on the CSI-RS measurement quantities, the UE includes measurements only for the cells not yet included in measResultListNR in measResultNeighCells to avoid overriding SS/PBCH block-based ordered measurements."

Note: the examples given are not a comprehensive list of all the technical differences between the TDocs, but rather a few examples to support the highlighted differences.

TDoc comparison: R2-2302611 (CATT) R2-2303646 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

1. MeasResult2EUTRA-r16 and MeasResultRLFNR-r16 are two different SEQUENCE types.
2. MeasResult2EUTRA-r16 contains carrier frequency and measurement result list for EUTRA.
3. MeasResultRLFNR-r16 contains measurement result for cell results, rsIndex results and critical extensions.
4. MeasResultFreqList is a SEQUENCE of MeasResult2NR.
5. MeasResultSCG-Failure is an optional parameter for MeasResultFreqList.

Example snippets from the TDoc to support the difference highlighting:

1. MeasResult2EUTRA-r16 ::= SEQUENCE { carrierFreq-r16 ARFCN-ValueEUTRA, measResultList-r16 MeasResultListEUTRA }
2. MeasResultRLFNR-r16 ::= SEQUENCE { measResult-r16 SEQUENCE { cellResults-r16 SEQUENCE{ resultsSSB-Cell-r16 MeasQuantityResults OPTIONAL, resultsCSI-RS-Cell-r16 MeasQuantityResults OPTIONAL }, rsIndexResults-r16 SEQUENCE{ resultsSSB-Indexes-r16 ResultsPerSSB-IndexList OPTIONAL, ssbRLMConfigBitmap-r16 BIT STRING (SIZE (64)) OPTIONAL, resultsCSI-RS-Indexes-r16 ResultsPerCSI-RS-IndexList OPTIONAL, csi-rsRLMConfigBitmap-r16 BIT STRING (SIZE (96)) SEQUENCE { rrc-TransactionIdentifier RRC-TransactionIdentifier, criticalExtensions CHOICE { ueInformationResponse-r16 UEInformationResponse-r16-IEs, criticalExtensionsFuture 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting INTEGER (0..1023) =
3. MeasResultFreqList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxFreq)) OF MeasResult2NR -- TAG-SCGFAILUREINFORMATION-STOP -- ASN1STOP End of Changes MeasResultFreqList OPTIONAL, measResultSCG-Failure OCTET STRING (CONTAINING MeasResultSCG-Failure) OPTIONAL
4. MeasResult2EUTRA-r16 contains carrier frequency and measurement result list for EUTRA.
5. MeasResultRLFNR-r16 contains measurement result for cell results, rsIndex results and critical extensions.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303717 (Qualcomm Inc.) R2-2304083 (China Unicom, CATT)

• TDoc R2-2303717: Technical differences include:
- The UE supports QCI1 indication in Radio Link Failure Report and has a DRB for which QCI is 1: include the drb-EstablishedWithQCI-1
- Set the connectionFailureType to rlf
- Set the c-RNTI to the C-RNTI used in the PCell
- Set the rlf-Cause to the trigger for detecting radio link failure
- If the UE is configured with (NG)EN-DC; and if T316 is configured; and if SCG transmission is not suspended; and if the SCG is not deactivated; and if neither NR PSCell change nor NR PSCell addition is ongoing: The measurements are based on the time domain measurement resource restriction, if configured.
Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303717: "except for NB-IoT, if the UE supports QCI1 indication in Radio Link Failure Report and has a DRB for which QCI is 1: include the drb-EstablishedWithQCI-1"

• TDoc R2-2304083: Technical differences include:
- Packet loss is expected to be upper bounded by the PER (packet error rate, as defined in TS 23.501)
- The granularity for Packet loss rate measurement is per DRB per UE
- The statistical accuracy of an individual packet loss rate measurement result is dependent on how many packets have been received, and thus the time for the measurement.
Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304083: "The statistical accuracy of an individual packet loss rate measurement result is dependent on how many packets have been received, and thus the time for the measurement."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302653 (China Unicom) R2-2303696 (Qualcomm Incorporated)

: The following bullet point list summarizes technical differences among the TDocs:

[TDoc R2-2302653]:
- Proposal to introduce a new measurement of packet loss rate in Rel-17 for TS 38.314
- The numerator of the measurement for DL packet loss rate formula defined in TS 38.314 doesn't contain successfully transmitted but delayed packets
- This is only suitable for QoS Flows with non-GBR resource type and GBR resource type, but not suitable for QoS Flows with delay-critical GBR resource type
- L2 measurements can represent the performance of the network and corresponding optimization of layer 2 can be made
- Reasonable to restrict the discussion scope only in Layer 2 measurement
- No Uu, NG, Xn interface signalling involved
- Statistical accuracy of an individual packet loss rate measurement result is dependent on how many packets have been received and the time for the measurement

[TDoc R2-2303696]:
- Current procedure does not have NB-IoT UEs report availability of the RLF report to the network
- Network may request NB-IoT UE to report the RLF report without explicit indication in the UEInformationRequest-NB by configuring rlf-ReportReq
- NB-IoT UEs do not report the availability of the RLF report to the network
- UE reports the location information in any subsequent measurement report including RLF report and SCGFailureInformationNR if obtainLocation is configured at the UE.









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.10.1 : General and Stage 2 corrections
Entity CBR Configuration SL DRX IUC IUC Cast Type Groupcast/Broadcast Control of Idle/Inactive UEs
RAN1 (R1-2302174) OPPO contact, default CBR configuration response - Reply LS to RAN2 (R2-2302410) - - - - -
Huawei, HiSilicon (R2-2302684) - SL DRX for unicast, groupcast, broadcast, SL active time parameters (16.9.6) - - - -
Ericsson, Apple (R2-2302839) - - SL UE supports IUC in Mode 2, resource (re)selection (16.9.8) - - -
Ericsson (R2-2302840) - - - UE-A sends resource info to UE-B, resource (re)selection (16.9.8) - -
Xiaomi (R2-2303213) - - - - SL DRX for groupcast/broadcast, QoS profile, Destination L2 ID (16.9.6.3) -
Apple (R2-2303383) - - - - - RRC_IDLE or RRC_INACTIVE UEs, sidelink communication, upper layers configuration (16.9.4.3)


TDoc comparison: R2-2302684 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303213 (Xiaomi) R2-2303383 (Apple)

• TDoc R2-2302684:
- RX UE can send assistance information to TX UE to determine SL DRX configuration for RX UE.
- TX UE determines SL DRX configuration for RX UE in RRC_IDLE/RRC_INACTIVE/OOC or in RRC_CONNECTED and using mode 2 resource allocation, regardless of whether assistance information is provided or not.
- RX UE can report received SL DRX configuration to serving gNB when using mode 1 resource allocation in RRC_CONNECTED.
- TX UE selects resources taking into account active time of RX UE(s) configured with SL DRX.

• TDoc R2-2303213:
- UE reports each destination L2 ID and associated SL DRX on/off indication to gNB supporting SL DRX when in RRC_CONNECTED and using mode 1 resource allocation for groupcast.
- RX UE maintains a single SL DRX cycle and single SL on-duration for each destination L2 ID when multiple QoS profiles are configured for that L2 ID for groupcast and broadcast.
- TX UE restarts its timer corresponding to the SL inactivity timer for the destination L2 ID upon reception of new data with the same destination L2 ID for groupcast.
- RX UE selects the largest SL inactivity timer value if multiple SL inactivity timer values associated with different QoS profiles are configured for that L2 ID for groupcast.

• TDoc R2-2303383:
- UE reports each destination L2 ID and associated SL DRX on/off indication to gNB supporting SL DRX when in RRC_CONNECTED and using mode 1 resource allocation for groupcast.
- TX UE restarts its timer corresponding to the SL inactivity timer for the destination L2 ID upon reception of new data with the same destination L2 ID for groupcast.
- TX UE selects resources taking into account active time of RX UE(s) determined by timers maintained at the TX UE when data is available for transmission to one or more RX UE(s) configured with SL DRX for groupcast.
- RX UE maintains a single SL DRX cycle and single SL on-duration for each destination L2 ID when multiple QoS profiles are configured for that L2 ID for groupcast and broadcast.

Examples:
- TDoc R2-2302684: "Regardless of whether assistance information is provided or not, the TX UE in RRC_IDLE/RRC_INACTIVE/OOC, or in RRC_CONNECTED and using mode 2 resource allocation, determines the SL DRX Configuration for the RX UE."
- TDoc R2-2303213: "For groupcast, the RX UE maintains a single SL DRX cycle (selected as the smallest SL DRX cycle of any QoS profile of that L2 ID) and single SL on-duration (selected as the largest SL on-duration of any QoS profile of that L2 ID) for each destination L2 ID when multiple QoS profiles are configured for that L2 ID."
- TDoc R2-2303383: "When data is available for transmission to one or more RX UE(s) configured with SL DRX, the TX UE selects resources taking into account the active time of the RX UE(s) determined by the timers maintained at the TX UE."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302839 (Ericsson, Apple) R2-2302840 (Ericsson)

- The TDoc R2-2302839 supports two schemes of inter-UE coordination: IUC scheme 1 and IUC scheme 2.
- In IUC scheme 1, the IUC information sent from one UE to another UE can be either preferred or non-preferred resources for the sending UE's transmission.
- In IUC scheme 2, the IUC information sent from one UE to another UE is the presence of expected/potential resource conflict on the resources indicated by the sending UE's SCI. The receiving UE uses these resources as the set of non-preferred resources or excludes them to determine a set of preferred resources.
- The resources for (re)selection of both UEs can be based on both their sensing results (if available) and the IUC information, or only on the IUC information.
- For IUC information transmission triggered by a condition other than an explicit request, the preferred resource set is transmitted in unicast manner and the non-preferred resource set is transmitted in unicast, groupcast, or broadcast manner.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302839: "UE's resources for resource (re)selection can be based on both UE's sensing results (if available) and the IUC information, or it can be based only on IUC information."

- In TDoc R2-2302840, only IUC scheme 1 is supported.
- The transmission of IUC information from one UE to another UE can be triggered either by an explicit request or by a condition at the sending UE.
- The sending UE determines the set of resources reserved by other UEs or slots where it does not expect to perform SL reception from the receiving UE due to half-duplex operation.
- The resources for (re)selection of the receiving UE can be based on both its sensing results (if available) and the IUC information received from the sending UE or only on the IUC information.
- For scheme 1, MAC CE and second-stage SCI or MAC CE only can be used to send IUC information.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302840: "The resources for resource (re)selection of the receiving UE can be based on both UE-B's sensing results (if available) and the IUC information received from UE-A, or it can be based only on IUC information received from UE-A."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.10.2 : Control plane corrections
Entity SL Grant Reception & SCI Transmission SL Enhancements Default CBR Configuration DRX Timer Length Control Plane Corrections
CATT RRC corrections (R2-2302617) Usage of default CBR configuration (R2-2302617)
Huawei, HiSilicon 38.331 corrections (R2-2302683),
TS 38.304 corrections (R2-2302686)
Control plane corrections summary (R2-2304150)
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell Discussion on default CBR configuration (R2-2302795)
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips Field description correction (R2-2303907),
Default CBR configuration correction (R2-2303908)
ASUSTeK Discussion on timer length (R2-2303925),
Option 1a corrections (R2-2303926)
ASUSTeK, vivo Option 1b corrections (R2-2303927)


TDoc comparison: R2-2302617 (CATT) R2-2302683 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303908 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips)

1. TDoc R2-2302617: SL-CBR-PriorityTxConfigList information element

- This information element indicates the mapping between PSSCH transmission parameter sets by using the indexes of the configurations provided in sl-CBR-PSSCH-TxConfigList, CBR ranges by an index to the entry of the CBR range configuration in sl-CBR-RangeConfigList, and priority ranges.
- The SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..8)) OF SL-PriorityTxConfigIndex-r16 is used to define the priority list.
- The TAG-SL-CBR-PRIORITYTXCONFIGLIST-START and TAG-SL-CBR-PRIORITYTXCONFIGLIST-STOP are used to mark the start and end of this information element.

2. TDoc R2-2302683: SL-MinMaxMCS-Config-r16

- This information element defines the minimum and maximum MCS values for PSSCH transmission.
- It uses the SEQUENCE {sl-MCS-Table-r16 ENUMERATED {qam64, qam256, qam64LowSE}, sl-MinMCS-PSSCH-r16 INTEGER (0..27), sl-MaxMCS-PSSCH-r16 INTEGER (0..31)} to define the MCS table.
- SL-BetaOffsets-r16 is used to define beta offsets.
- This information element is used in UECapabilityInformationSidelink, uuMessageTransferSidelink-r17, UuMessageTransferSidelink-r17, and remoteUEInformationSidelink-r17.

3. TDoc R2-2303908: SL-CBR-CommonTxConfigList information element

- This information element is used to configure the common transmission parameters for CBR services.
- It uses the SEQUENCE {sl-CBR-RangeConfigList-r16 SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCBR-Config-r16)), SL-CBR-PriorityTxConfigList-r16, SL-CBR-r16, sl-TxParameters-r16, SL-PSSCH-TxParameters-r16} to define the configuration parameters.
- The TAG-SL-CBR-COMMONTXCONFIGLIST-START and TAG-SL-CBR-COMMONTXCONFIGLIST-STOP are used to mark the start and end of this information element.
- SL-CBR-RangeConfigList-r16 is used to define the CBR range configuration.

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2302617:

- "The IE SL-CBR-PriorityTxConfigList indicates the mapping between PSSCH transmission parameter (such as MCS, PRB number, retransmission number, CR limit) sets..."
- "The SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..8)) OF SL-PriorityTxConfigIndex-r16 is used to define the priority list."
- "The TAG-SL-CBR-PRIORITYTXCONFIGLIST-START and TAG-SL-CBR-PRIORITYTXCONFIGLIST-STOP are used to mark the start and end of this information element."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2302683:

- "This information element defines the minimum and maximum MCS values for PSSCH transmission."
- "It uses the SEQUENCE {sl-MCS-Table-r16 ENUMERATED {qam64, qam256, qam64LowSE}, sl-MinMCS-PSSCH-r16 INTEGER (0..27), sl-MaxMCS-PSSCH-r16 INTEGER (0..31)} to define the MCS table."
- "SL-BetaOffsets-r16 is used to define beta offsets."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303908:

- "This information element is used to configure the common transmission parameters for CBR services."
- "It uses the SEQUENCE {sl-CBR-RangeConfigList-r16 SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCBR-Config-r16)), SL-CBR-PriorityTxConfigList-r16, SL-CBR-r16, sl-TxParameters-r16, SL-PSSCH-TxParameters-r16} to define the configuration parameters."
- "The TAG-SL-CBR-COMMONTXCONFIGLIST-START and TAG-SL-CBR-COMMONTXCONFIGLIST-STOP are used to mark the start and end of this information element."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303907 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303926 (ASUSTeK) R2-2303927 (ASUSTeK, vivo)

• The three TDocs all relate to the DRX-ConfigSL information element used for configuring additional DRX parameters for UE performing sidelink operation with resource allocation mode 1, as specified in TS 38.321.
• The ASN1START and ASN1STOP tags are the same in all three TDocs.
• The SEQUENCE for DRX-ConfigSL-r17 is the same in all three TDocs.
• The ENUMERATED values for drx-RetransmissionTimerSL-r17 are the same in all three TDocs.
• TDoc R2-2303907 specifies the DRX-ConfigSL IE as part of Sidelink information elements, while TDocs R2-2303926 and R2-2303927 specify it as part of Radio resource control information elements.
• TDoc R2-2303907 includes additional text about the end and start of the change in April 2023, which is not present in the other two TDocs.
• TDoc R2-2303926 includes a reference to #121bis-e, while TDoc R2-2303927 includes a reference to 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting [3].

Examples from TDoc R2-2303907:
- "6.3.5 Sidelink information elements...- DRX-ConfigSL"
- "The IE DRX-ConfigSL is used to configure additional DRX parameters for the UE performing sidelink operation with resource allocation mode 1, as specified in TS 38.321"

Examples from TDoc R2-2303926:
- "6.3.2 Radio resource control information elements...- DRX-ConfigSL"
- "The IE DRX-ConfigSL is used to configure additional DRX parameters for the UE performing sidelink operation with resource allocation mode 1, as specified in TS 38.321"
- "#121bis-e R2-2303926 Electronic, 17th April – 26th April 2023"

Examples from TDoc R2-2303927:
- "6.3.2 Radio resource control information elements...- DRX-ConfigSL"
- "The IE DRX-ConfigSL is used to configure additional DRX parameters for the UE performing sidelink operation with resource allocation mode 1, as specified in TS 38.321"
- "#121bis-e R2-2303927 Electronic, 17th April – 26th April 2023"
- "3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting [3]"

TDoc comparison: R2-2302686 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2302795 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303925 (ASUSTeK)

1. Sidelink Communication:

- When UE is in-coverage for sidelink operation according to clause 8.2, it may perform NR sidelink communication according to SIB12.
- When UE is out-of-coverage for sidelink, it may perform NR sidelink communication according to SL-V2X-PreconfigurationNR or according to SIB12 of the cell on the frequency which provides inter-carrier NR sidelink configuration.
- For NR sidelink broadcast and groupcast, the UE may obtain SL DRX configuration from SIB12 (for in-coverage UE in RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE state) or SL-PreconfigurationNR (for UE out-of-coverage).

2. Inter-UE Coordination Information:

- The UE may obtain inter-UE coordination (IUC) information configuration from SIB12 (for in-coverage UE in RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE state) or SL-PreconfigurationNR (for UE out-of-coverage).

3. Default CBR Parameters:

- RAN2 continued a discussion on whether the case was valid when default CBR parameters are applied to normal pool when full sensing result is used and available.
- There was a 50-50 split of opinions in regard to whether the case was valid or not.
- RAN1 does not see any major difference in behavior by adding the parameters for default CBR with adding parameters for partial and random resource selection pool.
- This TDoc handles the matter of whether “case 3” is valid or not in respect to the usage of default CBR for partial and random resource selection.

4. SL Grant without PDCCH:

- For SL configured grant type-1, there is no associated PDCCH and therefore no corresponding BWP for the UE to derive the numerology of the timers.
- The UE may derive the length of drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerSL/drx-RetransmissionTimerSL based on the active DL BWP of the PCell also for SL grants other than SL configured grant type-1.

Example snippets from the TDoc:

1. Sidelink Communication:

- "For NR sidelink broadcast and groupcast, the UE may obtain SL DRX configuration from SIB12 (for in-coverage UE, as defined in clause 8.2, in RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE state) or SL-PreconfigurationNR (for UE out-of-coverage)." [TDoc R2-2302686]
- "For inter-UE coordination (IUC) information configuration, the UE may obtain it from SIB12 (for in-coverage UE, as defined in clause 8.2, in RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE state) or SL-PreconfigurationNR (for UE out-of-coverage)." [TDoc R2-2302686]

2. Default CBR Parameters:

- "However, the chair made a quick vote to see companies’ opinion on the applicable cases: In, RAN2 continued a discussion on whether the case was valid when default CBR parameters are applied to normal pool when full sensing result is used and available, with a 50-50 split of opinions in regard to whether the case was valid (i.e. CBR measurement is not available although full sensing result is available) or not (i.e. default CBR parameters are not used when full sensing result is available)." [TDoc R2-2302795]
- "Observation 2: RAN1 does not see any major difference in behaviour by adding the parameters for default CBR with adding parameters for partial and random resource selection pool." [TDoc R2-2302795]
- "This Tdoc handles the (R1-2302174) on the matter of whether “case 3” is valid or not in respect to the usage of default CBR for partial and random resource selection." [TDoc R2-2302795]

3. SL Grant without PDCCH:

- "For SL configured grant type-1, there is no associated PDCCH and therefore no corresponding BWP for the UE to derive the numerology of the timers." [TDoc R2-2303925]
- "Proposal 2: RAN2 to discuss whether the UE derives the length of drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerSL/drx-RetransmissionTimerSL based on the active DL BWP of the PCell also for SL grants other than SL configured grant type-1." [TDoc R2-2303925]









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.10.3 : User plane corrections
Entity Resource (re-)selection CBR Configuration SL Enhancements DRX Timers Usage of Default CBR Values User Plane Corrections IUC Procedure
CATT [R2-2302618] [R2-2302619] Correction on NR sidelink resource selection; received dynamically, semi-persistently, or autonomously [R2-2302618] Correction on case for default CBR configuration [R2-2302619]
OPPO [R2-2302647] Discussion on default CBR value issue; RAN2 consensus, LS sent to RAN1 [R2-2302647]
Huawei, HiSilicon [R2-2302685] Correction on 38.321 for SL enhancements; Active time, SL DRX configuration [R2-2302685]
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [R2-2302908] SL DRX timers BWP numerology; Discontinuous Reception (DRX) [R2-2302908]
Xiaomi [R2-2303214] [R2-2303215] Discussion on usage of default CBR values for NR sidelink; RAN2 meetings, LS to RAN1 [R2-2303214]; Correction on usage [R2-2303215]
LG Electronics France [R2-2303743] [R2-2303744] [R2-2303745] Summary on user plane corrections for NR SL enhancements [R2-2303743]; User plane corrections on NR Sidelink enhancements [R2-2303745] Summary of IUC procedure in re-evaluation/pre-emption/conflict indicator [R2-2303744]


TDoc comparison: R2-2302618 (CATT) R2-2302619 (CATT)

Technical Differences between TDoc R2-2302618 and TDoc R2-2302619:

1. TDoc R2-2302619 has an additional NOTE indicating that the resources for transmission should follow the specifications in clause 8.1.4 of TS 38.214.
Example from TDoc R2-2302619: "randomly select the time and frequency resources for one transmission opportunity from the resources indicated by the physical layer as specified in clause 8.1.4 of TS 38.214 and are specified in clause 8.1.4 of TS 38.214 NOTE"

2. TDoc R2-2302618 and TDoc R2-2302619 both have a condition for selecting the sl-defaultTxConfigIndex or CBR measurement results.
Example from TDoc R2-2302618 and TDoc R2-2302619: "if CBR measurement results are available or the corresponding sl-defaultTxConfigIndex configured by RRC if CBR measurement results are not available"

3. TDoc R2-2302618 and TDoc R2-2302619 both have a condition for selecting resources when sl-InterUE-CoordinationScheme1 is not configured by RRC.
Example from TDoc R2-2302618 and TDoc R2-2302619: "if sl-InterUE-CoordinationScheme1 enabling reception/transmission of preferred resource set and non-preferred resource set is not configured by RRC"

4. TDoc R2-2302618 and TDoc R2-2302619 both have a condition for selecting resources when transmission is based on random selection by upper layers.
Example from TDoc R2-2302618 and TDoc R2-2302619: "if transmission based on random selection is configured by upper layers:"

5. TDoc R2-2302618 and TDoc R2-2302619 both have a condition for randomly selecting time and frequency resources based on the amount of selected frequency resources, remaining PDB of SL data available, and the latency requirement of the triggered SL CSI reporting.
Example from TDoc R2-2302618 and TDoc R2-2302619: "randomly select the time and frequency resources for one transmission opportunity from the resources pool which occur within the SL DRX Active time if configured as specified in clause 5.28.2 of the destination UE selected for indicating to the physical layer the SL DRX Active time above, according to the amount of selected frequency resources and the remaining PDB of SL data available in the logical channel(s) allowed on the carrier, and the latency requirement of the triggered SL CSI reporting."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302647 (OPPO) R2-2303215 (Xiaomi) R2-2303744 (LG Electronics France) R2-2303745 (LG)

• TDocs R2-2302647, R2-2303215, R2-2303744, and R2-2303745 are all related to Sidelink (SL) communication in 5G wireless networks.

• The main technical difference among these TDocs is related to the way time and frequency resources are selected for SL communication.

• TDocs R2-2302647 and R2-2303215 specify that time and frequency resources are randomly selected for one transmission opportunity from the resources pool that occurs within the SL DRX Active time if configured, according to the amount of selected frequency resources and the remaining PDB of SL data available in the logical channel(s) allowed on the carrier. However, R2-2302647 specifies that time and frequency resources are selected based on the resources indicated by the physical layer, while R2-2303215 specifies that they are selected from the resources pool.

• TDocs R2-2303744 and R2-2303745 specify that time and frequency resources are randomly selected from the resources later than the resources for either the removed resource or the dropped resource indicated by a prior SCI, from the resource indicated by the physical layer, which occur within the SL DRX active time. However, R2-2303744 specifies that time and frequency resources are selected according to the amount of selected frequency resources, the selected number of HARQ retransmissions, and the remaining PDB of either SL data available in the logical channel(s), while R2-2303745 excludes this last requirement.

• The bullet points below highlight some of the example snippets from the original TDocs that support the differences mentioned above:

- TDoc R2-2302647: "randomly select the time and frequency resources for one transmission opportunity from the resources indicated by the physical layer" vs. "randomly select the time and frequency resources for one transmission opportunity from the resources pool"
- TDoc R2-2303215: "according to the amount of selected frequency resources and the remaining PDB of SL data available in the logical channel(s)" vs. "according to the amount of selected frequency resources, the selected number of HARQ retransmissions, and the remaining PDB of either SL data available in the logical channel(s)"
- TDoc R2-2303744: "by ensuring the minimum time gap between any two selected resources of the selected sidelink grant in case that PSFCH is configured for this pool of resources" vs. "excluding..."
- TDoc R2-2303745: "excluding..."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302685 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2302908 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

Technical differences between TDoc R2-2302685 and TDoc R2-2302908:

1. TDoc R2-2302685 deals with Sidelink (SL) communications, while TDoc R2-2302908 deals with uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) communications.
- Example from TDoc R2-2302685: "if the corresponding Sidelink process was not successfully decoded"
- Example from TDoc R2-2302908: "if a MAC PDU is transmitted in a configured uplink grant"

2. TDoc R2-2302685 involves starting timers for retransmission, while TDoc R2-2302908 involves setting timers related to RTT (round trip time).
- Example from TDoc R2-2302685: "start the sl-drx-RetransmissionTimer/sl-DRX-GC-RetransmissionTimer"
- Example from TDoc R2-2302908: "set HARQ-RTT-TimerUL-NTN for the corresponding HARQ process equal to drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerUL plus the latest available UE-gNB RTT value"

3. TDoc R2-2302685 deals with groupcast transmissions, while TDoc R2-2302908 deals with HARQ (hybrid automatic repeat request) modes.
- Example from TDoc R2-2302685: "if the SCI indicates a new transmission where the cast type is set to groupcast"
- Example from TDoc R2-2302908: "if the corresponding HARQ process is configured as HARQModeA"

4. TDoc R2-2302685 involves starting timers based on the availability of resources, while TDoc R2-2302908 involves starting timers based on the end of a transmission.
- Example from TDoc R2-2302685: "start the sl-drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer for the corresponding Sidelink process in the slot following the end of PSSCH transmission"
- Example from TDoc R2-2302908: "start the HARQ-RTT-TimerUL-NTN for the corresponding HARQ process in the first symbol after the end of the last transmission (within a bundle) of the corresponding PUSCH transmission"

Example from TDoc R2-2302908: "stop the drx-RetransmissionTimerUL for the corresponding HARQ process" is not directly related to any of the differences mentioned above.









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 6.11 : RACH indication and partitioning
Entity Random Access Procedure PDCCH Order MAC Entity RRC Events TS 38.300
Vivo Initialization, described in clause 5.1.1 [Ref R2-2302668] Initiates the Random Access procedure [Ref R2-2302668] Initiates the Random Access procedure by itself [Ref R2-2302668] Initiates the Random Access procedure for events [Ref R2-2302668] Reference to technical specification for differentiating concepts [Ref R2-2302668]










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.1.1 : Organizational
Entity Concept 1: RRC Concept 2: MAC CE Concept 3: NCR Concept 4: UE Capability Concept 5: PDCP Parameters Concept 6: Beam Failure Detection and Recovery Concept 7: MAC Issues Concept 8: 38.300 Running CR
RAN1 (R1-2302227) LS to RAN2 on RRC parameters [R2-2302414] LS to RAN2 on MAC CE parameters [R2-2302414] Contact: ZTE [R2-2302414]
Intel Corporation (R2-2302789, R2-2302790) Draft 306 and 331 CR of NCR UE capability [R2-2302789, R2-2302790] Modified PDCP-Parameters section [R2-2302790]
ZTE Corporation (R2-2303289) RRC running CR for R18 NCR [R2-2303289]
Samsung (R2-2303445, R2-2303446) Introducing support for NCR to 38.321 [R2-2303445] Beam Failure Detection and Recovery procedure [R2-2303445] Outstanding MAC issues for NCR [R2-2303446]
CATT (R2-2303901) 38.304 running CR for R18 NCR [R2-2303901]
Ericsson (R2-2304113) 38.300 Running CR for NCR [R2-2304113]


TDoc comparison: R2-2302414 (RAN1) R2-2302789 (Intel Corporation)

1. TDoc R2-2302414 discusses the RRC and MAC CE parameters for NCR in Rel-18.
- "RRC parameters and MAC CE parameters attached are agreed based on the RAN1’s progress on side control information indication."
- "Discussion on the detailed signalling structure can be considered in RAN2."

2. TDoc R2-2302414 provides information on upcoming TSG WG1 meetings.
- "TSG WG#1 RAN1#112-bis-e 17th – 26th Apr 2023 Online"
- "TSG WG#1 RAN1#113 22th – 26th May 2023 Incheon, KR."
- "ACTION: RAN1 kindly asks RAN2 to take the attached RRC and MAC CE parameter into account."

3. TDoc R2-2302789 modifies section abbreviations in TR 21.905 for the present document.
- "For the purposes of the present document, the abbreviations given in TR 21.905 Modified section 4.2.2 General parameters."
- "An abbreviation defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same abbreviation, if any, in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply."

Example snippets:
- "RRC parameters and MAC CE parameters attached are agreed based on the RAN1’s progress on side control information indication." (TDoc R2-2302414)
- "Discussion on the detailed signalling structure can be considered in RAN2." (TDoc R2-2302414)
- "TSG WG#1 RAN1#112-bis-e 17th – 26th Apr 2023 Online" (TDoc R2-2302414)
- "TSG WG#1 RAN1#113 22th – 26th May 2023 Incheon, KR." (TDoc R2-2302414)
- "An abbreviation defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same abbreviation, if any, in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply." (TDoc R2-2302789)

TDoc comparison: R2-2303445 (Samsung) R2-2303446 (Samsung R&D Institute UK) R2-2303901 (CATT)

TDoc R2-2303445:

- The first snippet describes the beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure for a serving cell when a PDCCH with an uplink grant for a new transmission is received.
- If the PDCCH contains BFR information for a specific BFD-RS (beam failure detection reference signal) set of the serving cell, the BFI_COUNTER of that set is set to 0 and all triggered BFRs for that set are cancelled.
- If the serving cell is an SCell (secondary cell), and it is deactivated, the BFI_COUNTER of all BFD-RS sets of the SCell is set to 0, and all triggered BFRs for all sets of the serving cell are cancelled.
- The serving cell can only have two BFD-RS sets if failureDetectionSet1 and failureDetectionSet2 are configured for the active DL BWP of the serving cell.

TDoc R2-2303446:

- This TDoc summarizes MAC impact and related proposals for NCR (New Radio Carrier) work.
- Proposal 1 confirms the use of the one-octet eLCID space for new NCR MAC CEs, as per TDoc R2-2303445.
- Proposal 2 suggests the use of a new dedicated RNTI value, NCR-RNTI, for NCR-MT (New Radio Carrier-Message Type) operation for sending side control information.
- The rapporteur acknowledges that the new NCR MAC CEs are more complex than the NCR AC Link Beam Indication MAC CE and cannot be uniquely identified by the L-field in the MAC sub-header.

TDoc R2-2303901:

- This TDoc outlines the cell reselection criteria for a UE performing slice-based cell reselection.
- If the highest ranked or best cell in a frequency does not support the NSAG (Network Slice Assistance Information Group) derived according to clause 5.2.4.5, but supports other NSAGs according to this clause, the UE re-derives a reselection priority for the frequency based on the supported NSAG(s) of that cell.
- If the cell does not support any NSAG according to clause 5.2.4.5 or any other NSAG, the UE re-derives a reselection priority for the frequency as if none of the NSAG(s) provided by NAS is supported.
- The UE only performs cell reselection evaluation for NR frequencies and inter-RAT frequencies that are given in system information and have a provided priority.
- TreselectionNR specifies the timer value for cell reselection for NR.

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303445:

- "if a PDCCH addressed to C-RNTI indicating uplink grant for a new transmission is received for the HARQ process used for the transmission of the Enhanced BFR MAC CE or Truncated Enhanced BFR MAC CE which contains beam failure recovery information of this BFD-RS set of the Serving Cell"
- "set BFI_COUNTER of the BFD-RS set to 0"
- "consider the Beam Failure Recovery procedure successfully completed for this BFD-RS set and cancel all the triggered BFRs of this BFD-RS set of the Serving Cell"
- "if the Serving Cell is SCell and the SCell is deactivated as specified in clause 5.9"
- "set BFI_COUNTER of each BFD-RS set of SCell to 0"
- "consider the Beam Failure Recovery procedure successfully completed and cancel all the triggered BFRs of all BFD-RS sets of the Serving Cell"
- "The Serving Cell is configured with two BFD-RS sets if and only if failureDetectionSet1 and failureDetectionSet2 are configured for the active DL BWP of the Serving Cell."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303446:

- "This tdoc captures several outstanding issues to do with MAC impact of NCR work"
- "RAN2 confirms that the one-octet eLCID space should be used for the new NCR MAC CEs, as per R2-2303445"
- "RAN2 confirms that the name to be used for a new dedicated RNTI value for NCR-MT operation (for sending of side control information) is NCR-RNTI (subject to any alignment with RAN1)."
- "These MAC CEs are admittedly more complex than the NCR AC Link Beam Indication MAC CE, and in rapporteur’s understanding, relying solely on L-field in the MAC sub-header for these MAC CEs would not resolve to a unique MAC CE layout."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303901:

- "For a UE performing slice-based cell reselection"
- "if the highest ranked cell or best cell in a frequency fulfils the inter- freqeuency cell reselection criteria (see clause 5.2.4.5) based on reselection priority for the frequency and NSAG derived according to this clause or fulfils intra-frequency and equal priority inter-frequency cell reselection criteria (see clause 5.2.4.6), but this cell does not support the NSAG according to this clause"
- "if this cell supports any other NSAG(s) according to this clause, the UE shall re-derive a reselection priority for the frequency by considering the NSAG(s) supported by this cell (rather than those of the corresponding NR frequency);"
- "Otherwise, the UE shall re-derive a reselection priority for the frequency as if none of the NSAG(s) provided by NAS is supported."
- "The UE shall only perform cell reselection evaluation for NR frequencies and inter-RAT frequencies that are given in system information and for which the UE has a priority provided."
- "TreselectionNR This specifies the cell reselection timer value TreselectionRAT for NR."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303289 (ZTE Corporation) R2-2304113 (Ericsson)

1. Maximum number of supported configurations for PUCCH cell switching: The TDoc R2-2303289 defines the maximum number of supported configurations of primary PUCCH group and secondary PUCCH group config. The maxCBR-Config-r16 INTEGER is defined as 8, which means the maximum number of CBR range configurations for sidelink communication congestion control is 8. The maxCBR-Config-1-r16 INTEGER is defined as 7, which means the maximum number of CBR range configurations for sidelink communication congestion control minus 1.

2. Maximum number of PUCCH Resources per PUCCH-ResourceSet: The maxNrofPUCCH-P0-PerSet INTEGER is defined as 8, which means the maximum number of P0-pucch present in a p0-pucch set is 8.

3. Maximum number of RSs used as pathloss reference for PUCCH power control: The maxNrofPUCCH-PathlossReferenceRSs INTEGER is defined as 4, which means the maximum number of RSs used as pathloss reference for PUCCH power control is 4.

4. Maximum number of services which the UE can include in the MBS interest indication: The maxNrofMBS-Session-r17 INTEGER is defined as 1024, which means the maximum number of services which the UE can include in the MBS interest indication is 1024.

5. Maximum number of cells supporting the NSAG: The maxNrofTRS-ResourceSets-r17 INTEGER is defined as 64, which means the maximum number of cells supporting the NSAG is 64.

6. Direct Path: The TDoc R2-2304113 defines Direct Path as a type of UE-to-Network transmission path, where data is transmitted between a UE and the network without sidelink relaying.

7. AS functionality enabling ProSe non-Relay Discovery and ProSe UE-to-Network Relay discovery: The TDoc R2-2303289 defines AS functionality enabling ProSe non-Relay Discovery and ProSe UE-to-Network Relay discovery for Proximity based Services as defined in TS 23.304 [48] between two or more nearby UEs, using NR technology but not traversing any network node.

8. IAB-MT: The TDoc R2-2303289 defines IAB-MT as an IAB-node function that terminates the Uu interface to the parent node using the procedures and behaviours specified for UEs unless stated otherwise.

9. Indirect Path: The TDoc R2-2304113 defines Indirect Path as a type of UE-to-Network transmission path, where data is forwarded via a U2N Relay UE between a U2N Remote UE and the network.

10. Uu Relay RLC channel: The TDoc R2-2303289 defines Uu Relay RLC channel as an RLC channel between L2 U2N Relay UE and gNB, which is used to transport packets over Uu for L2 UE-to-Network Relay.

11. gNB: The TDoc R2-2303289 defines gNB as a node providing E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UE, and connected via the NG interface to the 5GC.

Example snippets from the original TDoc:

- "maxCBR-Config-r16 INTEGER ::= 8" (TDoc R2-2303289)
- "maxNrofPUCCH-P0-PerSet INTEGER ::= 8" (TDoc R2-2303289)
- "maxNrofPUCCH-PathlossReferenceRSs INTEGER ::= 4" (TDoc R2-2303289)
- "maxNrofMBS-Session-r17 INTEGER ::= 1024" (TDoc R2-2303289)
- "maxNrofTRS-ResourceSets-r17 INTEGER ::= 64" (TDoc R2-2303289)
- "Direct Path: a type of UE-to-Network transmission path, where data is transmitted between a UE and the network without sidelink relaying." (TDoc R2-2304113)
- "AS functionality enabling ProSe non-Relay Discovery and ProSe UE-to-Network Relay discovery for Proximity based Services as defined in TS 23.304 [48] between two or more nearby UEs, using NR technology but not traversing any network node." (TDoc R2-2303289)
- "IAB-MT: IAB-node function that terminates the Uu interface to the parent node using the procedures and behaviours specified for UEs unless stated otherwise." (TDoc R2-2303289)
- "Indirect Path: a type of UE-to-Network transmission path, where data is forwarded via a U2N Relay UE between a U2N Remote UE and the network." (TDoc R2-2304113)
- "Uu Relay RLC channel: an RLC channel between L2 U2N Relay UE and gNB, which is used to transport packets over Uu for L2 UE-to-Network Relay." (TDoc R2-2303289)
- "gNB: node providing E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UE, and connected via the NG interface to the 5GC." (TDoc R2-2303289)









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.1.2 : Signalling for side control information
Entity NCR ON/OFF Behaviour Side Control Configuration RRC_CONNECTED Mode RRC_INACTIVE Mode RLF at NCR-MT MAC CE Design NCR RRC Running CR
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [Ref R2-2302927] Further issues, NCR-Fwd ON/OFF configuration Side control information from gNB NCR-MT in RRC_CONNECTED, NCR-Fwd ON or OFF - During RLF at NCR-MT - -
Lenovo [Ref R2-2303237] - Remaining issues, network-controlled repeater - - - - -
vivo [Ref R2-2303263] - - - - - MAC CE Design for Semi-Persistent Beam Configuration -
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips [Ref R2-2303290] - - - - - - Remaining issues in NCR RRC running CR, long term email discussion
China Telecom [Ref R2-2303772] - Considerations on signalling for side control information - - - - -


TDoc comparison: R2-2302927 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303237 (Lenovo)

The technical differences among the TDoc can be summarized as follows:

1. Control of NCR behaviour in IDLE mode: TDoc R2-2303237 proposes that the gNB should be able to control the NCR behaviour in IDLE mode by configuring side control information in RRC CONNECTED mode or RRC release message. This would ensure that the NCR does not go out of control when it enters IDLE mode.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303237: "Proposal 1: gNB can control NCR behaviour in IDLE mode by configure side control information in RRC CONNECTED mode or RRC release message."

2. Validity time duration of side control information: TDoc R2-2303237 also proposes that a valid timer should be used to control the validity time duration of side control information for NCR in IDLE mode. This would ensure that the NCR does not use outdated side control information when it resumes operation.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303237: "Proposal 2: A valid timer is used to control the validity time duration of side control information for NCR in IDLE mode."

3. Wake-up timer for NCR-MT: TDoc R2-2303237 proposes that a timer should be used to wake up the NCR-MT from IDLE mode and trigger it to establish RRC connection with the gNB. This would ensure that the NCR-MT does not remain in IDLE mode indefinitely and can resume operation when needed.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303237: "Proposal 3: A timer is used to wake up NCR-MT from IDLE mode and trigger NCR-MT to establish RRC connection with gNB."

4. Resumption of NCR-MT after cell reselection: TDoc R2-2302927 highlights the need for the NCR-MT to resume operation after cell reselection so that it can receive side-control configuration from the new gNB. This can be done through network configuration using existing specifications.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302927: "After cell reselection, the NCR-MT to resume so that it can receive side-control configuration from the new gNB (can be done by network configuration using existing specifications)."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.1.3 : Other RAN2 aspects
Concept Intel Corporation Qualcomm Inc. Nokia Fujitsu NEC Lenovo vivo Kyocera ZTE Corporation Apple China Telecom AT&T Huawei, HiSilicon Samsung R&D Institute UK Ericsson
NCR Remaining Open Issues RRC state, cell (re)selection, RNTI [R2-2302787] RRC_INACTIVE, RRC_IDLE [R2-2302947] RRC states [R2-2303238] Cell reselection in RRC_INACTIVE state [R2-2303264] Remaining issues [R2-2303276] RRC spec open issues [R2-2303288] IDLE/INACTIVE states [R2-2303387] RRC state, NCR-Fwd ON/OFF, cell (re)selection [R2-2303775] CP issues [R2-2303974] Remaining issues, transitioning from IDLE to CONNECTED [R2-2304114], [R2-2304115]
Beam Reselection RRC_INACTIVE state [R2-2302893]
RRC Release with Redirection NCR aspect [R2-2302928]
Releasing NCR-MT to RRC_IDLE Methods to get NCR-MT back to RRC_CONNECTED [R2-2302944]
Side Control Information Signaling Remaining issues [R2-2303264] Signaling for SCI [R2-2303387]
Cell Selection for NR Network-controlled Repeaters Enhancements over conventional RF repeaters [R2-2303944]
NCR Failure and Reestablishment Handling of NCR failure and reestablishment [R2-2304004]
NCR Procedures and Stage 2 Corrections Further considerations on NCR procedures and Stage 2 corrections [R2-2304015]


TDoc comparison: R2-2302787 (Intel Corporation) R2-2302788 (Intel Corporation) R2-2302947 (NEC) R2-2303264 (vivo) R2-2303276 (Kyocera ) R2-2303288 (ZTE Corporation) R2-2303291 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303387 (Apple)

NCR-MT treats certain cell settings as if they were set to allowed, including cellBarred, cellReservedForOperatorUse, cellReservedForFutureUse, and intraFreqReselection (NOTE x).

It is unclear whether CRC bits for scheduling PDSCH carrying side control information are scrambled by C-RNTI or ncr-RNTI (Proposal 1).

The field specifying allowed/forbidden cells is only applicable to RedCap UEs and is indicated in MIB message (Proposal 1).

New IOT (capability) bits are introduced for non-supported features by NCR-MT (Summary).

NCR-MT may resume forwarding when released to RRC_IDLE with a wake-up timer provided by gNB. However, there is no specification for ensuring backhaul link quality or NCR-MT behavior when the timer is running (TDoc R2-2302947).

NCR-specific q-RxLevMinNCR is defined, and Qrxlevmin for NCR-MT cell selection criterion S is obtained from it (TDoc R2-2303264).

For NCR-MT in IDLE, autonomous RRC connection establishment is needed when it selects an acceptable cell or when no cell is found (TDoc R2-2303276).

NCR-Fwd is OFF when RLF is declared, and NCR can wait for new configuration from the network to resume forwarding (TDoc R2-2303291).

NCR-Fwd needs to use the same beam as gNB for backhaul link to ensure consistency (TDoc R2-2303387).

When releasing NCR-MT to RRC_INACTIVE state, NW decides which configuration is suitable for NCR in INACTIVE state. NCR-Fwd is switched OFF if NCR-MT in RRC_INACTIVE state reselects a different cell than the last serving cell (TDoc R2-2303387).

TDoc comparison: R2-2303775 (China Telecom) R2-2303974 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2304114 (Ericsson) R2-2304115 (Ericsson)

• The state (ON/OFF) of the NCR-Fwd and how to reconnect to the network when the NCR-MT is in idle state are open issues.

Example: "According to the above agreements, the state (ON/OFF) of the NCR-Fwd and how to reconnect to the network when the NCR-MT is in idle state are open issues."

• When the NCR-MT enters into the RRC_IDLE while the NCR-Fwd is on, the NCR can fall back to the legacy RF repeater to ensure network coverage.

Example: "In addition, when the NCR-MT enters into the RRC_IDLE while the NCR-Fwd is on, the NCR can fall back to the legacy RF repeater to ensure network coverage."

• The behaviour of NCR-Fwd when the NCR-MT is in RRC_IDLE still needs to be determined.

Example: "However, the behaviour of NCR-Fwd when the NCR-MT is in RRC_IDLE still needs to be determined."

• In the definition of T3512, we see that the timer is normally stopped when the UE enters state 5GMM-DEREGISTERED or 5GMM-CONNECTED mode, which means the T3512 may still be running when the UE previously camping on the acceptable cell goes back to the suitable cell.

Example: "In the definition of T3512, we see that the timer is normally stopped when the UE enters state 5GMM-DEREGISTERED or 5GMM-CONNECTED mode, which means the T3512 may still be running when the UE previously camping on the acceptable cell goes back to the suitable cell."

• When NCR-MT is released to RRC_IDLE, the NCR-Fwd can be ON or OFF following the last configuration received from the gNB.

Example: "When NCR-MT is released to RRC_IDLE, the NCR-Fwd can be ON or OFF following the last configuration received from the gNB."

• The support of BFD and BFR appear as beneficial for the management of NCR.

Example: "We would like to start by highlighting that since FR2 appears to be key for NCRs, the support of BFD and BFR appear as beneficial for the management of NCR."

• The NG-RAN that requests the paging to the core network is the last node to have the NCR-MT in RRC_CONNECTED, but it may not be the same node later.

Example: "Also, the NG-RAN that requests the paging to the core network is the last node to have the NCR-MT in RRC_CONNECTED, but it may not be the same node later."

• Introducing a new signalling over the NG interface to request the core network to page the NCR-MT is not desirable, as it is complex and needs the involvement of SA and CT (which are not part of the WID).

Example: "Introducing a new signalling over the NG interface to request the core network to page the NCR-MT is not desirable, as it is complex and needs the involvement of SA and CT (which are not part of the WID)."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302928 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303238 (Lenovo) R2-2304004 (Samsung R&D Institute UK) R2-2304015 (Samsung R&D Institute UK)

Technical Differences among TDocs:

1. Observation 5: Not supporting or optionally supporting RRC release with redirection in NCR has specification impacts; mandating that NCR-MT supports RRC release with redirection does not preclude a gNB from not triggering the mechanism for NCR-MT.

- This observation highlights the impact of not supporting RRC release with redirection in NCR and proposes that mandating NCR-MT to support it does not prevent a gNB from choosing not to use it.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302928: "Not supporting or optionally supporting RRC release with redirection in NCR has specification impacts; mandating that NCR-MT supports RRC release with redirection does not preclude a gNB from not triggering the mechanism for NCR-MT."

2. Observation 2: RRC release with redirection is not an ideal substitute for handover since redirection is based on carrier frequency; and there are limited ways (possibly only through network slicing) that the gNB can even know which cell or carrier is preferred for NCR.

- This observation points out that RRC release with redirection is not a perfect replacement for handover due to its reliance on carrier frequency and the limited methods available to the gNB to determine the preferred cell or carrier for NCR.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302928: "RRC release with redirection is not an ideal substitute for handover since redirection is based on carrier frequency; and there are limited ways (possibly only through network slicing) that the gNB can even know which cell or carrier is preferred for NCR."

3. Conclusion: Legacy paging is not enough for NCR-MT to transit from IDLE to CONNECTED mode.

- This conclusion suggests that relying solely on legacy paging is insufficient for NCR-MT to transition from IDLE to CONNECTED mode.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303238: "Observation: Legacy paging is not enough for NCR-MT to transit from IDLE to CONNECTED mode."

4. Proposal 1: NCR-MT transit from IDLE to CONNECTED mode based on gNB indication e.g. configured timer that in RRC release message or gNB based paging.

- This proposal recommends using a gNB indication, such as a timer configured in an RRC release message or a paging message with NCR-MT ID, to transition NCR-MT from IDLE to CONNECTED mode.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2303238: "More specifically, to control the NCR-MT transit from RRC_IDLE mode to RRC_CONNECTED mode, gNB can configure a timer in RRC connection release message, which indicate after how long time NCR-MT needs to enter RRC_CONNECTED mode and receive the RRC signaling from gNB again. On the other hand, if gNB want to control NCR-MT and trigger NCR-MT to enter RRC_CONECTED mode, gNB can send a paging message with NCR-MT id. NCR-MT monitor the paging for itself and if it receive the paging message from gNB with indication to enter RRC_CONNECTED mode, NCR-MT starts to establish RRC connection with gNB."

5. If the RRCReconfiguration message was received as part of ConditionalReconfiguration: continue using the configuration used prior to when the inability to comply with the RRCReconfiguration message was detected.

- This statement specifies the action to be taken if the RRCReconfiguration message was received as part of ConditionalReconfiguration.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304004: "3> if the RRCReconfiguration message was received as part of ConditionalReconfiguration: 4> continue using the configuration used prior to when the inability to comply with the RRCReconfiguration message was detected."

6. The compliance also covers the SCG configuration carried within octet strings e.g. field mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig.

- This statement clarifies that compliance also covers the SCG configuration carried within octet strings, such as the field mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304004: "NOTE 0a: The compliance also covers the SCG configuration carried within octet strings e.g. field mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig."

7. If sdt-MAC-PHY-CG-Config is configured: configure the PCell with the configured grant resources for SDT and instruct the MAC entity to start the cg-SDT-TimeAlignmentTimer.

- This statement provides instructions for configuring the PCell with the grant resources for SDT and starting the cg-SDT-TimeAlignmentTimer if sdt-MAC-PHY-CG-Config is configured.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304015: "3> if sdt-MAC-PHY-CG-Config is configured: 4> configure the PCell with the configured grant resources for SDT and instruct the MAC entity to start the cg-SDT-TimeAlignmentTimer."

8. The Network should provide full configuration to UE for SRS for Positioning in RRC_INACTIVE.

- This statement recommends that the network provide full configuration to UE for SRS for Positioning in RRC_INACTIVE.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304015: "NOTE 1b: The Network should provide full configuration to UE for SRS for Positioning in RRC_INACTIVE."

9. Remove all the entries within the MCG and the SCG VarConditionalReconfig, if any.

- This statement instructs to remove all the entries within the MCG and the SCG VarConditionalReconfig, if any.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304015: "2> remove all the entries within the MCG and the SCG VarConditionalReconfig, if any."

10. If the associated measObjectId is only associated to a UE Inactive AS Context, except for the fields explicitly specified. No specification impact.

- This statement specifies that there is no specification impact if the associated measObjectId is only associated to a UE Inactive AS Context, except for the explicitly specified fields.
- Example snippet from TDoc R2-2304015: "3> if the associated measObjectId is only associated to a UE Inactive AS Context, except for the fields explicitly specified. No specification impact."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302893 (Qualcomm Inc.) R2-2302944 (Fujitsu)

Technical Differences:

1. The RRC forwarding configuration used by the NCR-FWD after the NCR-MT enters RRC_INACTIVE:
- In TDoc R2-2302893, it is observed that the backhaul beam for the forwarding is not indicated.
- Additionally, the NCR-MT cannot receive dynamic indication of the backhaul beam for the NCR-FWD while in RRC_INACTIVE.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302893: "The RRC forwarding configuration used by the NCR-FWD after the NCR-MT enters RRC_INACTIVE does not indicate the backhaul beam for the forwarding."

2. Resuming connection in case of beam reselection:
- In proposal 2 from TDoc R2-2302893, it is suggested that the NCR-MT in RRC_INACTIVE state should resume connection to receive updated side control configuration if it reselects a new beam of the same camped cell.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302893: "The NCR-MT in RRC_INACTIVE resumes connection to receive updated side control configuration if it reselects a new beam of the same camped cell."

3. Wake-up timer maintenance:
- In TDoc R2-2302944, option 2 suggests that when RRC of the NCR-MT receives RRCRelease message with wake-up timer, RRC of the NCR-MT forwards the timer value to NAS of the NCR-MT and the timer is maintained by NAS of the NCR-MT.
- Possible option 1 is also mentioned, which involves RRC of NCR-MT sending a notification to NAS of NCR-MT at the expiry of the wake-up timer.

Example snippet from TDoc R2-2302944: "When RRC of the NCR-MT receives RRCRelease message with wake-up timer, RRC of the NCR-MT forwards the timer value to NAS of the NCR-MT and the timer is maintained by NAS of the NCR-MT."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.2.1 : Organizational
Entity LS on LPP message PRU Procedures Low Power or High Accuracy Positioning Support of Multiple Target UEs Work Plan on Rel-18 Positioning Work Item SLPP Specification TS 38.355 Skeleton
CT1 LPP message and supplementary service event report, user plane connection, UE and LMF, Rel-18, 5G_eLCS_Ph3 (C1-231129; R2-2302403) - - - - - -
RAN1 - LS Reply on PRU procedures, NR_pos_enh2-Core, 5G_eLCS_Ph3 (R1-2302146; R2-2302409) - - - - -
SA2 - LS on PRU procedures, Rel-18, 5G_eLCS_Ph3 (S2-2303861; R2-2302449) LS on requirement on low power or high accuracy positioning, Rel-18, 5G_eLCS_Ph3 (S2-2303414; R2-2302446) LS on support of multiple target UEs, Rel-18, Ranging_SL (S2-2303837; R2-2302448) - - -
CATT, Intel, Ericsson - - - - Work Plan on Rel-18 Positioning Work Item, NR systems, SL PRS, sidelink positioning (R2-2302502) - -
Intel Corporation - - - - - Further Considerations on new SLPP specification, SLPP Configuration, SLPP Sessions and Transactions (R2-2302738) TS 38.355 skeleton, SLPP messages, SLPP information elements (R2-2302739)
Qualcomm Incorporated - PRU Procedures, simultaneous location measurements, target UE and PRU (R2-2302875) - Support of Multiple Target UEs for Sidelink Positioning (R2-2303513) - - -
vivo - Discussion and draft LS reply on PRU procedures (R2-2302957) - - - - -
Ericsson - On the Positioning Reference Units aspects (R2-2303707) - - - - -


TDoc comparison: R2-2302409 (RAN1) R2-2302446 (SA2) R2-2302448 (SA2) R2-2302449 (SA2)

Technical differences among the TDocs:

- TDoc R2-2302409: Addresses the lack of support in current RAN1 specifications for simultaneous measurements/transmissions for multiple UEs, including a target UE and a PRU. RAN1 will continue discussions on necessary enhancements to support simultaneous measurements/transmissions.
- TDoc R2-2302446: Discusses the support of low power and/or high accuracy positioning in the study phase of release 18 eLCS_Ph3 work item. SA2 asks RAN1, RAN2, and SA1 about the scope and requirements of this aspect.
- TDoc R2-2302448: Identifies use cases where multiple target UEs are involved in the same positioning session and asks RAN2 about the support of multiple target UEs and signalling of positioning results for them in the Ranging/SL Positioning Protocol.
- TDoc R2-2302449: Agrees on procedure enhancements for PRU support and asks RAN1 and RAN2 about required enhancements and the possibility of PRU providing its location information together with location measurements reports.

Example snippets from the TDocs:

- In TDoc R2-2302409, RAN1 requests for enhancements to LPP, NRPPa, and/or RAN signaling to support simultaneous measurements/transmissions for multiple UEs, including a target UE and a PRU.
- TDoc R2-2302446 highlights the study phase of release 18 eLCS_Ph3 work item and asks RAN1, RAN2, and SA1 about the scope and requirements of the low power and/or high accuracy positioning aspect.
- TDoc R2-2302448 asks RAN2 about the support of multiple target UEs and signalling of positioning results for them in the Ranging/SL Positioning Protocol.
- TDoc R2-2302449 asks RAN1 and RAN2 about required enhancements and the possibility of PRU providing its location information together with location measurements reports.

TDoc comparison: R2-2302957 (vivo) R2-2303707 (Ericsson)

• The proposal is to allow PRU to provide location information together with measurement reports
- "RAN2 sees the benefit to allow PRU to provide its location information together with the measurement reports" (Answer to Question 1)
- "RAN2 sees the benefit to allow PRU to provide its location information together with the measurement report" (Proposal 2)

• Current LMF can only require a device to report either a location estimate or positioning measurements
- "Currently, LMF can only require a device to report either a location estimate or positioning measurements" (TDoc R2-2303707)

• PRU UE should provide both location measurement and current location estimate using the same transaction upon NW request
- "PRU UE provides location measurement and current location estimate using the same transaction upon NW request" (TDoc R2-2303707)
- "PRU UE should provide both location measurement and current location estimate using the same transaction upon NW request" (TDoc R2-2303707)

• The stored PRU information may need to be updated
- "The stored PRU information may need to be updated" (TDoc R2-2303707)

TDoc comparison: R2-2302502 (CATT, Intel, Ericsson) R2-2302738 (Intel Corporation) R2-2302875 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2303513 (Qualcomm Incorporated)

- The TDoc specifies new core requirements and enhancements for enabling LPHAP use-case 6 in NR systems, including extending eDRX cycle beyond 10.24s in RRC_INACTIVE state towards meeting the battery life requirement for LPHAP and positioning-specific enhancement for eDRX cycle beyond 10.24s to be defined as part of Rel-18 WI on expanded and improved NR positioning.
- The TDoc also specifies solutions for support of sidelink positioning (including ranging) in NR systems, including specifying SL PRS for support of sidelink positioning and solutions for alignment between eDRX and PRS configurations.
- TDoc R2-2302738 proposes various changes to the ASN.1 part of SLPP, including following the NR RRC approach, defining ASN.1 elements for common UE capabilities in a dedicated section, having a common section for constraints, and introducing a setup release structure in SLPP.
- The RAN plenary approved the updated WID on expanded and improved NR positioning and allocated the specification number TS38.355 for new specification on Sidelink Positioning Protocol.
- Proposal 1 endorses the TS Skeleton in R2-230xxxx as the baseline for further updates.
- Proposal 2 addresses the location information provided by a PRU, specifying that a PRU should be able to report the location coordinates of the PRU only, the location measurements performed by the PRU only, or the location coordinates of the PRU together with any performed location measurements.
- Observation 3 notes that security and privacy are not impediments to distribution of SLPP Location Information to multiple target UEs within the same Ranging/SL Positioning session and proposes modifications to the SLPP Session based on capability information from a previous step.

Example snippets from the original TDoc supporting these differences include:

- "Specify enhancements for enabling LPHAP use-case 6 as defined in TS 22.104 including: Extending eDRX cycle beyond 10.24s in RRC_INACTIVE state towards meeting the battery life requirement for LPHAP [RAN2, RAN3, RAN4] Positioning-specific enhancement for eDRX cycle beyond 10.24s to be defined as part of Rel-18 WI on expanded and improved NR positioning."
- "Specify solutions for support of sidelink positioning (including ranging) in NR systems, including the following [RAN1, RAN2, RAN3, RAN4]: Specify SL PRS for support of sidelink positioning such that the SL PRS uses a comb-based (full RE mapping pattern is not precluded) frequency domain structure and a pseudorandom-based sequence where the existing sequence of DL-PRS is used as a starting point [RAN1]."
- "Regarding the ASN.1 part of SLPP, follow NR RRC approach, e.g. - FFS on Need code (e.g. how to support no UL/DL), support of delta signalling - Define ASN.1 elements for common UE capabilities in a dedicated section (i.e. “UE capability information elements”); FFS whether any positioning method specific capability IEs should be grouped by positioning method. - Common section for constraints - “nonCriticalExtension” at message level - Fields in the field description are sorted based on alphabetical order - FFS on whether setup release structure should be introduced in SLPP."
- "At RAN#99, RAN plenary approved the updated WID on expanded and improved NR positioning [7] and allocated the specification number TS38.355 for new specification on Sidelink Positioning Protocol as: In this contribution, we continue the discussion on the structure of TS38.355."
- "Proposal 1: Endorse the TS Skeleton in R2-230xxxx as baseline for further updates."
- "Regarding the 2nd SA2 question on 'Location information provided by a PRU', RAN2 to reply the following: 'A PRU should be able to report (a) the location coordinates of the PRU only, (b) the location measurements performed by the PRU only, or (c) the location coordinates of the PRU together with any performed location measurements, where location measurements above include the currently defined location measurements in LPP and potential new location measurements defined in Rel-18 and location coordinates provide the known location of the PRU, obtained independently from the location measurements.'"
- "Observation 3: Security and privacy are not impediments to distribution of SLPP Location Information to multiple target UEs within the same Ranging/SL Positioning session, including over unicast, groupcast or broadcast. RAN2’s current agreements already support request and distribution of Capability and Assistance data to multiple target UEs within the same Ranging/SL Positioning session, with that request and distribution supported over unicast, groupcast or broadcast for both UE-assisted and UE-based sidelink ranging and positioning."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.2.3 : RAT-dependent integrity
Entity RAT-Dependent Integrity Signaling and Procedure LMF-based Integrity UE-based Integrity Error Sources Positioning Methods Open Issues
CATT [R2-2302504] Discusses positioning integrity with consideration of issues UE-based integrity signaling and procedure LMF-based integrity signaling and procedure - - - -
Huawei, HiSilicon [R2-2302581] Discussion on agreements for RAT-dependent integrity - - - Error sources for RAT-dependent integrity - -
Intel Corporation [R2-2302741] Discusses support of integrity for RAT dependent positioning methods - - - - - -
vivo [R2-2302959] Agreements made for RAT-dependent integrity - - - Error modeling parameters for Gaussian overbounding distribution - -
OPPO [R2-2303184] Views on RAT-independent integrity Signaling enhancement to support LMF-based positioning - - Positioning integrity error sources from UE DL Uu based positioning method -
Lenovo [R2-2303230] Positioning integrity as a measure of trust in accuracy - - - - - -
Xiaomi [R2-2303433] Agreements on RAT-dependent positioning integrity - - - - - -
ZTE Corporation [R2-2303495] Views on RAN2 signaling to support integrity of RAT-dependent positioning methods - - - - - -
CMCC [R2-2303540] Discussion on integrity issues and agreements - - - Error sources overbounded by Gaussian distribution - -
Spreadtrum Communications [R2-2303571] Discusses solutions for integrity of RAT-dependent positioning techniques - - - - - -
Qualcomm Incorporated [R2-2303682] Integrity of NR positioning technologies - - - Error sources of NR positioning technologies - -
Ericsson [R2-2303705] RAT-dependent positioning integrity - - - - - -
InterDigital Communications [R2-2303994] Discusses RAT dependent integrity related open issues - - - - - Open issues related to RAT-dependent integrity
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [R2-2304058] Discusses spec impact of RAT-dependent error sources for positioning integrity - - - - - -


TDoc comparison: R2-2302504 (CATT) R2-2302959 (vivo) R2-2303230 (Lenovo) R2-2303433 (Xiaomi) R2-2303495 (ZTE Corporation) R2-2303540 (CMCC)

Technical Differences Among TDocs:

1. Implementation of Measurement Error Sources Bound Distribution
- Proposal to leave the acquisition of measurement error sources bound distribution to implementation or algorithm of LMF
- TRP related error sources are already known to LMF due to implementation
- No additional spec impacts to support LMF-based integrity from RAN perspective
- Any interaction between LMF and NG-RAN to support determination of error sources is in RAN3 scope

2. Granularity of Integrity Information
- Two options considered: UE to report integrity information directly or LMF to handle all error sources based on implementation
- DNU flag designed to ensure network provides usability of related GNSS signal and integrity service alerts
- Slightly prefer solution where UE reports own estimation of integrity information along with measurement information

3. RAT-Dependent Integrity Assistance Information
- RAT-dependent positioning methods involve UE, NG-RAN node, and LMF entity
- UE and network entity may perform integrity information collection and transmit to LMF or UE in timely manner
- Integrity alert output performed for both UE-based and LMF-based integrity modes

4. Signalling Procedures for LMF-Based Positioning Integrity
- LPP provide location information message used for UE reporting results related to integrity to LMF
- NRPPa message used for RAN to send results related to integrity to LMF
- UE and gNB provide error sources for different positioning methods

5. Error Source Association
- Rx-Tx time difference measurements should be associated with one set of error distribution parameters
- All RSTD measurements within a TRP should be associated with one set of error distribution parameters

Example Snippets from TDocs:

- "It is proposed to leave the acquisition of the measurement error sources bound distribution to implementation or algorithm of LMF, i.e., up to implementation or algorithm, LMF generate the measurement error sources bound distribution based on the measurement results reported by UE and/or NG-RAN in normal positioning procedure." (R2-2302504)
- "The DNU flag is designed to ensure that, for the current epoch, the network should provide the usability of the related GNSS signal (i.e. GNSS-RealTimeIntegrity, to provide a bad GNSS signal list) and integrity service alerts in terms of ionosphere or troposphere related information (i.e. ionosphereDoNotUse, TroposphereDoNotUse)." (R2-2302959)
- "Contrary to GNSS positioning integrity where UE is equipped with GNSS receiver and only UE and LMF transfer the integrity information, RAT-dependent positioning methods involve UE, NG-RAN node and LMF entity, and each entity may generate error sources or feared events which affect the integrity performances." (R2-2303230)
- "It is suggested that the UE could send the measurement error generated from UE, e.g. RSTD measurement, UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement, to LMF via LPP ProvideLocationInformation message while NG-RAN could send the error in assistant data and measurement generated from NG-RAN node, e.g. TRP location, RTOA measurement, inter-TRP synchronization, gNB." (R2-2303540)
- "For LMF-based integrity, LMF needs to know the error bounds of UE-side measurement error for calculating integrity results. If latter is applied, all RSTD measurements containing in a same measurement report (i.e., a same NR-DL-TDOA-ProvideLocationInformation LPP message) should be associated with one set of error distribution parameters." (R2-2303495)

TDoc comparison: R2-2302581 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303705 (Ericsson)

TDoc R2-2302581:

- The SEQUENCE includes milli-arc-second-units-r16, height-units-r16, delta-latitude-r16, delta-longitude-r16, delta-height-r16, and locationUNC-r16.
- milli-arc-second-units-r16 and height-units-r16 are ENUMERATED types.
- Delta-Latitude-r16 is a SEQUENCE that includes delta-Latitude-r16 and coarse-delta-Latitude-r16.
- Delta-Longitude-r16 is OF NR-DL-AoD-AdditionalMeasurementElement-r16.
- NR-DL-AoD-AdditionalMeasurementsExt-r17 is a SEQUENCE with a size range of 1 to maxAddMeasAoD-r17.

Example snippet: "height-units-r16 ENUMERATED {mm, cm, m, ...}"

TDoc R2-2303705:

- Error sources for LMF-based and UE-based positioning integrity modes are listed in Table 6.1.1-1.
- Identified candidates for distributions to model the errors due to different error sources are listed in Table 6.1.1-2.
- The RAT dependent positioning error sources are categorized.

Example snippet: "Table 6.1.1-1: Error sources for LMF-based and UE-based positioning integrity modes"

TDoc comparison: R2-2303571 (Spreadtrum Communications) R2-2303682 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2303994 (InterDigital Communications) R2-2304058 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

Technical differences among the TDocs:

1. TDoc R2-2303571 proposes modifications to the LPP and NRPPa protocols to deliver error sources related information for positioning integrity calculation estimation between UE, network, and LMF. For UE-based integrity, two types of error sources, including TRP location and inter-TRP synchronization, will be provided to UE via assistance data from LMF. For RAT-dependent positioning integrity, the Rel-17 standard will define the positioning integrity capabilities, including error source receiving, error source reporting, and positioning integrity result reporting.

2. TDoc R2-2303682 proposes optional provision of "Integrity Correlation Times" for the integrity assistance data in NR to allow the use of time-based estimation techniques in addition to snapshot-based techniques. The document also proposes providing Integrity Alert IEs in the Assistance Data for any bound that is still valid to satisfy the condition in Equation 8.x.2-1. The document further states that Integrity Bounds provide the statistical distribution of the errors.

3. TDoc R2-2303994 proposes studying which parameters in assistance data should be applied for DNU flags, and whether the UE and gNB need to provide additional measurements related to measurement error sources for LMF-based integrity of DL and UL positioning. The document also proposes reusing the integrity related IE and fields defined for GNSS integrity for RAT-dependent positioning integrity where possible, e.g., mean and standard deviation as bounds for an error source.

4. TDoc R2-2304058 proposes that the UE should provide integrity bounds for measurement errors in LMF-based mode for all measurements reported, and the LMF should be configured with integrity bounds for errors for these measurements. The document also proposes RAN2 to discuss and identify the residual risks specific and applicable to RAT-dependent positioning integrity and evaluate their impacts.

Example snippets from the original TDocs to support the difference highlighting:

- TDoc R2-2303571: "Thus, in order to obtain positioning integrity calculation estimation, error sources related information needs to be delivered between UE, network and LMF as shown in the table 1, which will modify the LPP and NRPPa protocols."
- TDoc R2-2303682: "The 'Integrity Correlation Times', defining the minimum time interval beyond which two sets of assistance data parameters for a given error can be considered to be independent from one another, should optionally be provided for the integrity assistance data for NR to allow the use of time-based estimation techniques (e.g. Kalman Filtering) in addition to snapshot-based techniques."
- TDoc R2-2303994: "Proposal 1: Study which parameters in assistance data should be applied for DNU flags. Proposal 2: Study whether there’s a need for the UE to provide additional measurements (e.g., statistical information about measurements) to the LMF related to measurement error sources for LMF-based integrity of DL positioning. Proposal 3: Study whether there’s a need for the gNB to provide additional measurements (e.g., statistical information about measurements) to the LMF related to measurement error sources for LMF-based integrity of UL positioning."
- TDoc R2-2304058: "For all measurements that are reported in the LMF-based mode (e.g. RSTD, UE Rx-Tx TD, DL-PRS RSRPP of the first path or RSRP of additional paths), where UE reports the measurement and LMF estimates the position and integrity results, the UE needs to provide the integrity bounds (for measurement errors) to the LMF or the LMF must be configured with integrity bounds for errors for these measurements."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.2.4 : LPHAP
Entity SRS Configuration LPHAP Enhancements DL Positioning eDRX Cycle Extension PRS & DRX Alignment Power Saving Positioning Implementation Considerations
Huawei, HiSilicon (R2-2302580) Agreement on SRS configuration with SRS validity area for UE reselection (R2-2302580)
Fraunhofer IIS, Fraunhofer HHI (R2-2302589) Proposal for LPHAP enhancements in Rel. (R2-2302589)
Intel Corporation (R2-2302742) Discussion on LPHAP enhancements and recommendations (R2-2302742)
vivo (R2-2302960) Agreement on SRS configuration with SRS validity area for UE reselection (R2-2302960)
Sony (R2-2303079) Discussion on Low Power High Accuracy Positioning (R2-2303079)
OPPO (R2-2303185) Agreement on SRS configuration with SRS validity area for UE reselection (R2-2303185) Discussion on LPHAP WI objectives (R2-2303185)
Lenovo (R2-2303231) Discussion on low power high accuracy positioning (R2-2303231)
Apple (R2-2303367) Discussion on alignment between DRX and PRS (R2-2303367)
Xiaomi (R2-2303434) Agreement on SRS configuration with SRS validity area for UE reselection (R2-2303434) Discussion on LPHA positioning and suggestions (R2-2303434)
ZTE Corporation (R2-2303494) Discussion on DL positioning in RRC_IDLE (R2-2303494) Discussion on eDRX cycle extension in RRC_INACTIVE (R2-2303494) Discussion on PRS&DRX alignment (R2-2303494) Discussion on power saving positioning enhancements (R2-2303494)
CMCC (R2-2303539) Considerations on LPHAP (R2-2303539)
Spreadtrum Communications (R2-2303570) Agreement on SRS configuration with SRS validity area for UE reselection (R2-2303570)
Qualcomm Incorporated (R2-2303697) Proposal for LPHAP enhancements, including low power periodic and triggered 5GC-MT-LR procedures (R2-2303697)
Ericsson (R2-2303704) Discussion on Low Power High Accuracy Positioning (R2-2303704)
Samsung (R2-2303886) Discussion on SRS configuration in RRC_INACTIVE (R2-2303886)
LG Electronics Inc. (R2-2303985) Discussion on LPHAP (R2-2303985)
InterDigital Communications (R2-2303995) Discussion on LPHAP (R2-2303995)
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell (R2-2304059) Discussion on PRS and DRX configuration alignment (R2-2304059)


TDoc comparison: R2-2302580 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2302589 (Fraunhofer IIS, Fraunhofer HHI) R2-2302742 (Intel Corporation) R2-2302960 (vivo) R2-2303079 (Sony) R2-2303185 (OPPO) R2-2303231 (Lenovo) R2-2303367 (Apple) R2-2303434 (Xiaomi)

Technical differences among the TDocs:

1. Approach for delivering DRX configuration to UE:
- Option1, PCCH-Config in SIB1 for both RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE
- Option2, PCCH-Config in RRCRelease message for RRC_INACTIVE
- Option3, NAS message for both RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE received when the UE is in RRC_CONNECTED

2. Mapping of SRS configuration to downlink reference signal:
- Proposal 3: A SRS configuration shall be mapped to a downlink reference signal
- UE could be configured to monitor certain downlink resources (occasional DL-PRS)

3. Reporting of DL-PRS measurements in RRC_IDLE state:
- Proposal 8: RAN2 to send LS to SA2, to inform them that RAN has agreed to support “DL PRS measurements for a UE in RRC_IDLE state and reporting of the measurements in RRC_CONNECTED state”
- Proposal 3: RAN2 to agree that the DL-PRS configuration to be applied in the RRC_Idle state could be valid in a large area, i.e., list of cells, to keep the continuity of the positioning service in the RRC_Idle state.

4. Determination of UL timing for SRS transmission:
- Option 1: UE maintains the TA obtained from the last serving cell within the validity area
- Option 2: UE autonomously adjusts the TA

5. Communication of positioning results to the network:
- Hence, regardless of whether UE-based or network-based positioning is used, in the end the result needs to be communicated to the network, which requires the UE to be connected.

Example snippets from the original TDocs:

- "When multiple DRX cycles are configured with the options above, the UE should choose the shortest cycle to monitor paging such that the UE does not miss any paging occasion, either from the gNB or from the LMF."
- "For the UL timing advance, further study the following options, including the DL reference timing for each option: Option 1: UE maintains the TA obtained from the last serving cell within the validity area Option 2: UE autonomously adjusts the TA"
- "Proposal 2: When UE moves out of the cell which configures the SRS with the validity area for the UE, the SRS transmission from the UE will lead to inference to other UE in serving cell, and the inference should be avoid."
- "Proposal 3: A SRS configuration shall be mapped to a downlink reference signal, the measurement on the DL reference signal indicates to the UE whether some other UE in the network is currently using the uplink SRS configuration or not."
- "Observation 1: TS 22.104 use-case 6 “tracking of workpiece in assembly area” and usage of DL positioning are likely to require the UE to be in RRC_CONNECTED, therefore only C-DRX needs to be considered for PRS alignment (according to TS 22.104)."
- "Proposal 8: RAN2 to send LS to SA2, to inform them that RAN has agreed to support “DL PRS measurements for a UE in RRC_IDLE state and reporting of the measurements in RRC_CONNECTED state” and would like to check whether the CN can handle the measurement reports from the UE in RRC_CONNECTED, while the positioning was performed in RRC_IDLE for MO-LR, MT-LR and NI-LR."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303494 (ZTE Corporation) R2-2303570 (Spreadtrum Communications) R2-2303704 (Ericsson) R2-2303886 (Samsung)

TDoc R2-2303494:

- PTW-enabled UE should request multiple PRS periodicity values for alignment of paging cycle inside and outside PTW.
- UE monitors CN paging or RAN paging based on minimum paging cycle value and paging location parameter in RRC SIB.

TDoc R2-2303570:

- RAN1 progress needed for validation of SRS transmission with interference, timing advance, and spatial relation information.
- Option 1 is more power efficient and less complex to avoid SRS configuration update or activation/deactivation procedure during UE movement within validity area.

TDoc R2-2303704:

- Exposure of LPHAP information to gNB and/or LMF can be discussed in normative work for any agreed enhancement of LPHAP.
- UE continues SRS transmission during reselection to another cell within SRS validity area, subject to validation.

TDoc R2-2303886:

- LMF needs to request multiple TRP sets to measure SRS from target UE even if UE can transmit SRS toward only one set of TRPs.
- Proposal 1: Discuss possibility of configuring different spatial relation information/pathloss reference for each cell within validity area for SRS configuration.

Example snippets:

- "...the UE should request more than 1 PRS periodicity values in a on-demand PRS request for the alignment of paging cycle inside the PTW and outside the PTW, respectively."
- "UE monitors CN paging or RAN paging according to the minimum paging cycle value...and the paging location parameter in the RRC SIB."
- "Option 1 is more power efficient and less complex."
- "UE continues the SRS transmission, subject to validation for SRS transmission."
- "...configuring different spatial relation information/pathloss reference in the SRS configuration can be configured differently for each cell within validity area..."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303697 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2304059 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell)

Technical Differences:

1. RRC SRS Activation message: The receiving gNB may send an RRC SRS Activation message to the UE, which includes the ID of the preconfigured SRS to be activated, along with the pathloss reference, spatial relation, the TA timer, and RSRP-change-threshold. This is highlighted in section 5 of TDoc R2-2303697.

2. DL-PRS measurements in RRC_IDLE state: Proposal 11 suggests performing DL-PRS measurements for a UE in RRC_IDLE state and reporting the measurements in RRC_CONNECTED state using existing signaling. A new NG-RAN triggered NRPPa procedure may also be possible, but it may not provide CN DRX information for idle mode to the LMF. The UE may set the dl-prs-ResourceSetPeriodicityReq based on the configured LCS reporting activity and (e)DRX configuration. This is mentioned in both sections 5 and 6 of TDoc R2-2303697.

3. (e)DRX/PRS alignment optimization: Based on the knowledge of the UE's (e)DRX configuration, the LMF can optimize the PRS configuration of the UE so that the PRS measurement (or SRS transmission) can be aligned with the already configured (e)DRX active time. This can reduce power consumption of the UE for PRS measurement or SRS transmission when it wakes up from sleep. This is discussed in TDoc R2-2304059.

4. Impact of UE mobility on (e)DRX configuration: UE mobility necessitates changes to (e)DRX configuration if the DRX configuration is aligned for a given/fixed PRS configuration, and this may impact the (e)DRX performance of other UEs. This observation is also mentioned in TDoc R2-2304059.

Example Snippets:

1. Section 5 of TDoc R2-2303697: "The receiving gNB may then send an RRC SRS Activation message to the UE which includes the ID of the preconfigured SRS to be activated, and possibly the pathloss reference, spatial relation, the TA timer and RSRP-change-threshold."

2. Section 6 of TDoc R2-2303697: "Performing DL-PRS measurements (or any other positioning measurements) for a UE in RRC_IDLE state and reporting of the measurements in RRC_CONNECTED state can already be supported with existing signaling."

3. TDoc R2-2304059: "Based on the knowledge of the UE's (e)DRX configuration, the LMF can optimize the PRS configuration of the UE so that the PRS measurement (or SRS transmission) can be aligned with the already configured (e)DRX active time, which can reduce power consumption of the UE for PRS measurement or SRS transmission when it wakes up from sleep."

4. TDoc R2-2304059: "UE mobility necessitates changes to (e)DRX configuration if the DRX configuration is aligned for a given/fixed PRS configuration, and this may impact the (e)DRX performance of other UEs."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303539 (CMCC) R2-2303985 (LG Electronics Inc.)

1. SRS configuration validation in RRC_INACTIVE/RRC_IDLE UEs:
- UE continues SRS transmission when reselecting to another cell within SRS validity area during SRS transmission
- RSRP threshold and TAT value for SRS introduced for time alignment validation
- TA-related issue to be solved for Rel-18 SRS configuration enhancements
- Proposal to support broadcast of SRS configuration
(TDoc R2-2303539)

2. DL-PRS configuration:
- Two directions of solutions for DRX/PRS alignments based on "PRS alignment with fixed DRX" or "DRX alignment with fixed PRS"
- Three directions of solutions according to TR 38.859
(TDoc R2-2303985)

3. Positioning in RRC_IDLE state:
- PRS measurement in RRC_IDLE recommended for normative work
(TDoc R2-2303985)

4. Power consumption issues with frequent RRC state transitions to RRC_CONNECTED for SRS configurations:
- Observation made during study phase
- LPP supports assistanceDataValidityArea for PRS validation across multiple cells in R17
(TDoc R2-2303985)









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.2.5 : RedCap positioning, carrier phase positioning, and bandwidth aggregation for positioning
Entity Carrier Phase Positioning Bandwidth Aggregation RedCap Positioning PRU NR DL and UL LPP Signaling Configuration
CATT [R2-2302506] Focus on NR DL and UL carrier phase positioning Bandwidth aggregation for positioning measurements Positioning for RedCap UEs - NR DL and UL carrier phase positioning - -
Intel Corporation [R2-2302743] Considerations on carrier phase positioning - - Discuss PRU under carrier phase positioning agenda - - -
Huawei, HiSilicon [R2-2302818] Carrier phase positioning enhancements Bandwidth aggregation enhancements RedCap positioning enhancements - - - -
Xiaomi [R2-2303435] - - Signaling procedures for RedCap UE positioning - - - -
ZTE Corporation [R2-2303496] - Configuration of bandwidth aggregation RedCap positioning configuration - - - RAN2 perspective on configuration
CMCC [R2-2303541] - - Enhancement to RedCap UE positioning - - - -
Ericsson [R2-2303706] Carrier phase positioning LPP signaling Bandwidth aggregation LPP signaling RedCap positioning LPP signaling - - Possible LPP signaling from RAN2 part of view -
Samsung [R2-2303887] - Discussion on bandwidth aggregation objectives - - - - -
InterDigital Communications [R2-2303996] Positioning for carrier phase positioning Bandwidth aggregation for positioning Positioning for RedCap positioning - - - -


TDoc comparison: R2-2302743 (Intel Corporation) R2-2302818 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303887 (Samsung) R2-2303996 (InterDigital Communications)

1. Postponement of positioning discussion for Bandwidth aggregation until progress in RAN1 is made. (TDoc R2-2302743)

Example: "Postpone the discussion on positioning for Bandwidth aggregation until there is reasonable progress in RAN1."

2. Potential RAN2 impact is to capture RAN1 parameters and feature lists, including enhancements to LPP, NRPPa, and/or RAN signaling for simultaneous measurements and transmissions. (TDoc R2-2302743, R2-2302818)

Examples: "Potential RAN2 impact is to capture RAN1 parameters, feature lists and may introduce new RAT dependent positioning method and corresponding measurements, procedure." "Regarding the support of PRU, SA2 asked questions in [3], e.g. Whether additional enhancement would be needed to support the simultaneous measurements for the target UE and PRU."

3. Awareness of RedCap UE capability at the LMF for supporting different positioning methods and aspects of a particular positioning method. (TDoc R2-2302818)

Example: "In the current specification, the capabilities in an LPP context refer to supporting of different positioning methods defined for LPP, different aspects of a particular positioning method (e.g. different types of assistance data for A-GNSS) and common features not specific to only positioning method (e.g. ability to handle multiple LPP transactions)."

4. Signaling designs for positioning of RedCap UEs, bandwidth aggregation, and carrier phase-based positioning. (TDoc R2-2303996)

Example: "Signalling designs for positioning of RedCap UEs, bandwidth aggregation and carrier phase-based positioning are needed to support the aforementioned functionalities."

5. SRS configuration for positioning in RRC_CONNECTED mode and potential enhancement for joint measurement and report for PRS resources aggregated across different PFLs. (TDoc R2-2303887)

Examples: "Regarding the SRS configuration for positioning, the UE is allowed to transmit SRS within the active UL BWP of a CC in RRC_CONNECTED mode in release 16." "RAN2 to discuss potential enhancement on provide/request location information in LPP to support the joint measurement and report for the PRS resources aggregated across different PFLs."

6. Details related to signaling of frequency hopping for PRS or SRS for positioning and clarification of reporting needed for carrier phase measurement. (TDoc R2-2303996)

Examples: "In addition, SRS hopping will be supported using mechanism different than BWP switching since the current specification supports only up to 4 BWPs which is not enough to cover 100MHz, which is the baseline bandwidth to yield satisfactory performance for positioning, assuming each BWP is 20MHz." "Although a definition for carrier phase measurement was agreed, details related to reporting needs more clarification."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303496 (ZTE Corporation) R2-2303706 (Ericsson)

Proposal 2:
- Supports on-demand PRS configuration with group information for PRS bandwidth aggregation
- UE can request on-demand PRS configuration ID(s) or group ID(s)
- UE can request PRS bandwidth larger than that of a single PFL implying PRS bandwidth aggregation request
- Example snippet: "The UE may request PRS configuration IDs or group IDs for PRS bandwidth aggregation."

Proposal 3:
- Supports LMF-initiated on-demand PRS request for PRS bandwidth aggregation
- LMF can request PRS bandwidth larger than that of a single PFL implying PRS bandwidth aggregation request
- Sends an LS to RAN3
- Example snippet: "The LMF may initiate on-demand PRS request for PRS bandwidth aggregation."

Proposal 4:
- Supports SRS bandwidth aggregation across carriers
- Higher layer signaling to indicate which carriers are linked
- SRS resources for positioning between linked carriers are one-to-one mapping
- Example snippet: "Higher layer signaling is required to indicate which carriers are linked, where the SRS resources for positioning between the linked carriers are one-to-one mapping."

[TDoc R2-2303706]:
- Discusses signaling of UE capability and mechanism to indicate DL-PRS that can be aggregated together in AD message in bandwidth aggregation for positioning
- Supports partially overlapped DL PRS frequency hopping and partially overlapped UL SRS frequency hopping for DL-TDOA, UL-TDOA and multi-RTT for RedCap UEs
- New or extended signaling needed to configure UL SRS configuration between LMF and UE, LMF and gNB, and between UE and gNB
- Supports reporting DL-PRS carrier phase and/or DL-PRS carrier phase difference with DL-TDOA positioning method
- No explicit frequency support for NB-IoT, but narrowband PRS can be separately configured on multiple NB-IoT carriers, resulting in artificial frequency hopping
- Example snippet: "To achieve these target positioning requirements for RedCap UEs, the recommended solutions from the corresponding SI in Rel-18 are partially overlapped DL PRS frequency hopping and partially overlapped UL SRS frequency hopping for DL-TDOA, UL-TDOA and multi-RTT."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.3.1 : Organizational
Entities SSB-less SCell Operation Cell DTX/DRX Mechanism UE DRX in RRC_CONNECTED Mode Inter-node Information Exchange Time/Frequency Synchronization L1/L3 Measurements SCell Activation Procedures
Huawei, HiSilicon Inter-band CA, FR1, co-located cells, SSB measurements on PCell or SCell, RAN4 study [R2-2303101] Enhancement, alignment with UE DRX, no change in SSB transmission, RAN2, RAN1, RAN3 [R2-2303101] Alignment with cell DTX/DRX, RRC_CONNECTED mode [R2-2303101] Inter-node information exchange on cell DTX/DRX, RAN2, RAN1, RAN3 [R2-2303101] UE measures SSB for time/frequency synchronization, downlink AGC [R2-2303101] UE measures SSB for L1/L3 measurements [R2-2303101] Potential enhancement on SCell activation procedures, RAN4, RAN2 [R2-2303101]










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.3.2 : DTX/DRX mechanism
Concept CATT, Dell Technologies, Turkcell (R2-2302763) Huawei, HiSilicon (R2-2302796, R2-2302797) ZTE Corporation, Sanechips (R2-2302835) Qualcomm Incorporated (R2-2302914) Intel Corporation (R2-2302976) LG Electronics Inc. (R2-2303152) Fraunhofer IIS, Fraunhofer HHI (R2-2303257)
Cell DTX/DRX impact on C-DRX Discusses adaptation of DTX/DRX technique for NES, UE and network behaviors, configuration and control mechanisms (R2-2302763) Summarizes views on Cell DTX/DRX configuration, activation/deactivation, alignment between Cell DTX/DRX and UE C-DRX (R2-2302796); Discusses cell DTX and DRX agreements (R2-2302797) Discusses agreements on Cell DTX/DRX, no impact on RACH, paging, SIBs, and behavior for Rel-18 NES capable CONNECTED UE(s) (R2-2302835) Discusses NES techniques and agreements on cell DTX/DRX, no impact on RACH, paging, SIBs, and behavior for Rel-18 NES capable CONNECTED UE(s) (R2-2302914) Further discusses procedure and signaling aspects of Cell DTX/DRX (R2-2302976) Discusses DTX/DRX mechanism for NES and agreements from R2-121 (R2-2303152) Discusses Cell DTX and DRX as an approach to reduce energy consumption of 5G NR networks (R2-2303257)


TDoc comparison: R2-2302763 (CATT, Dell Technologies, Turkcell) R2-2302796 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2302835 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2302914 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2302976 (Intel Corporation) R2-2303152 (LG Electronics Inc.) R2-2303310 (OPPO) R2-2303369 (Apple) R2-2303444 (BT plc) R2-2303604 (InterDigital) R2-2303663 (Ericsson)

-TDoc R2-2302763: Observation 1 proposes that restricting UE from monitoring PDCCH for dynamic grants/assignments for new transmissions during Cell DTX non-active period has no impact on network energy saving and only brings marginal UE power saving gain.

-TDoc R2-2302796: Proposal 5 suggests that cell level common L1 signalling for Cell DTX/DRX activation/deactivation is beneficial from RAN2 perspective. However, detailed comments indicate that this discussion is premature and further decisions are first needed on gNB and UE behaviour during cell DTX/DRX and gNB state definitions.

-TDoc R2-2302835: The document proposes that multiple DTX/DRX configurations require a configuration list in RRC that doesn’t greatly increase specification work. It also proposes that on-duration of each UE’ C-DRX should fall within Cell DTX active period, and Cell DTX non-active period should fall within the common part of C-DRX non-active period among UE.

-TDoc R2-2302914: Observation 4 suggests that configuring Cell DTX without UE CDRX is bad for UE power as it forces all UEs into being ON (decoding PDCCH) for longer than they need. The document also notes that L1 switching is an implementation challenge.

-TDoc R2-2303152: Observation 5 proposes that to achieve a tradeoff between UE power saving and latency, the active duration of UE CDRX can be extended in some cases.

-TDoc R2-2303369: Observation 4 suggests that if new transmission is to be considered in non-active period of Cell DTX, the UE in the cell can be configured with UE-specific Cell DTX inactivity timer.

-TDoc R2-2303604: The document discusses the expected gNB and UE behaviours during Cell DRX and Cell DTX non-active periods, and suggests that achieving additional UE energy savings through Cell DTX would be favourable.

Overall, the TDocs highlight various technical differences and proposals related to Cell DTX/DRX configuration, UE CDRX, PDCCH monitoring for dynamic grants/assignments, and gNB and UE behaviour during non-active periods. The proposals suggest potential solutions to achieve a tradeoff between network and UE energy savings, while also ensuring sufficient transmission and reception capabilities.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303792 (CMCC) R2-2303823 (vivo) R2-2303978 (KDDI Corporation) R2-2303984 (Rakuten Mobile, Inc)

Technical Differences among TDoc:

1. Cell DTX/DRX Configuration-related Issues:

- In Option 1, the gNB sends a dynamic indication to inform UE about the activation of cell DTX/DRX, and all UEs update the DRX parameters such as DRX cycle, drx-startoffset, or drx-slotoffset to a common start offset.

- In Option 2, the gNB pre-configures a UE DRX periodicity that is a multiple of the serving Cell’s DTX periodicity along with the cell DTX configuration.

- The alignment of UE DRX can be done along with L1 activation and deactivation of cell DTX/DRX.

- The UE does not expect to monitor PDCCH, but it is allowed to initiate UL transmission according to the configured resources during the UE DRX off period.

Example: "Option 2: The gNB pre-configures a UE DRX periodicity that is multiple of the serving Cell’s DTX periodicity along with the cell DTX configuration."

2. Single or Multiple Configurations:

- Multiple cell DTX/DRX configurations can enable the gNB to dynamically adjust cell DTX/DRX pattern.

Example: "Some companies suggest multiple cell DTX/DRX configurations can enable the gNB to dynamically adjust cell DTX/DRX pattern."

3. UE Active Time during Cell DTX Configuration:

- UE active time should be the moment that is overlapped within the Cell DTX on duration time.

- There is no need to introduce Cell DTX/DRX inactivity timer, similar to UE DRX inactivity timer mechanism in cell DTX/DRX configuration.

Example: "Proposal 2: When the Cell DTX is configured, the UE active time will be the time that is overlapped with the Cell DTX active period."

4. PDCCH Monitoring:

- Scheduling a DG-PUSCH can be a mechanism for the NW to override Cell DRX without the need for full-on reconfiguration.

- Restricting the periodicity of UE C-DRX configurations to be the same or a multiple of the serving Cell's DTX periodicity could negatively impact UE QoE by leaving the UE with few C-DRX on-duration occasions.

Example: "Observation 6: Restricting the periodicity of UE C-DRX configurations to be the same or a multiple of the serving Cell's DTX periodicity could negatively impact UE QoE by leaving the UE with few C-DRX on-duration occasions."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302797 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303827 (ETRI)

Technical Differences between TDoc R2-2302797 and R2-2303827:

1. UE Behaviour Change During Cell DTX Non-Active Period: TDoc R2-2302797 proposes that during the cell DTX non-active period, the UE should change its behaviour and proactively stop receiving/monitoring signals/channels that the gNB will not transmit to save power. The UE transitions to C-DRX sleep (stops PDCCH monitoring) during this period. Fig.1 shows an example of this behaviour change. In contrast, TDoc R2-2303827 does not propose any behaviour change during the cell DTX non-active period.

Example from TDoc R2-2302797: " Fig.1 UE C-DRX behaviour change according to the Cell DTX"

2. Exceptional Scheduling During Non-Active Time of Cell DTX/DRX: TDoc R2-2303827 proposes that exceptional scheduling in non-active time of Cell DTX/DRX may be allowed to a specific UE when the current DRX retransmission timer is running. This means that scheduling may be allowed for a specific UE (whose DRX retransmission timer is running) in non-active time of Cell DTX/DRX until the corresponding transmission is completed. In contrast, TDoc R2-2302797 does not propose any exceptional scheduling during the non-active time of Cell DTX/DRX.

Example from TDoc R2-2303827: "Proposal 3: Exceptional scheduling in non-active time of Cell DTX/DRX may be allowed to a specific UE when the current DRX retransmission timer is running."

3. Alignment Between UE C-DRX and Cell DTX/DRX: TDoc R2-2302797 proposes that the alignment between UE C-DRX and cell DTX/DRX is necessary and beneficial for power consumption and transmission reliability reasons. The existing UE C-DRX behaviour does not change during the Cell DTX active period. In contrast, TDoc R2-2303827 proposes that the alignment between Cell DTX and UE C-DRX may need not mean that the on-duration of UE C-DRX falls within the Cell DTX active period.

Example from TDoc R2-2302797: "Consequentially, the alignment between UE C-DRX and cell DTX/DRX is necessary and beneficial for power consumption and transmission reliability reasons."

Example from TDoc R2-2303827: "That is, the alignment between Cell DTX and UE C-DRX may need not mean that the on-duration of UE C-DRX falls within the Cell DTX active period."

4. Support for Exceptional Scheduling: TDoc R2-2303827 proposes that exceptional scheduling in non-active time of Cell DTX/DRX should be support optionally by network configuration. In contrast, TDoc R2-2302797 does not discuss support for exceptional scheduling.

Example from TDoc R2-2303827: "Also, the exceptional scheduling in non-active time of Cell DTX/DRX should be support optionally by network configuration."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303748 (Samsung) R2-2303773 (Xiaomi) R2-2303860 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2304181 (MediaTek Inc.)

• The Cell DTX/DRX configuration from gNB to UE would contain at least periodicity, start slot/offset, and on duration of the Cell DTX pattern.
• UEs may fail to decode L1 signals or are newly attached to the cell which may cause cell DTX/DRX status miss-match problem.
• There will be no impact to RACH, paging, and SIBs in idle/inactive for both gNB and Rel-18 and legacy UEs
• Rel-18 NES capable CONNECTED UE(s) can perform RACH and receive SIBs in non-active duration of cell DTX and/or DRX.
• Rel-18 UE does not transmit on UL channels during Cell DTX non-active period.
• The down selection for extension of cell DTX based on following options: Option 1.1: Yes, the notification of cell DTX active duration to other UEs is needed; Option 1.2: Yes, the notification of cell DTX active duration to other UEs is not needed; Option 2: If no, the pattern of cell DTX is up to the semi-static configuration and the mechanism of cell DTX is simple, but the flexibility is lost.
• UE shall send HARQ feedback for SPS, monitor possible retransmissions for SPS/CG and monitor responses for SR as well even if during non-active period.
• UE doesn’t monitor PDCCH for dynamic grants/assignments for new transmissions during Cell DTX non-active period, even if the UE is in C-DRX Active time.
• No reconfiguration of UE DRX is needed upon Cell DTX/DRX activation/deactivation.
• The alignment of C-DRX ON occasions between different UEs affects the common start time of Cell DTX/DRX.
• A common starting point of Cell DTX/DRX pattern in both the network and the UEs side cannot be guaranteed by the baseline proposal (i.e., activated immediately once configured by RRC.).
• The start offset (i.e., drx-LongCycleStartOffset) is used for spreading the network scheduling load corresponding to different C-DRX cycle lengths.

Example snippets from the original TDoc to support the difference highlighting:

• "However, with only the above two signals, there could be cell DTX/DRX status miss-match problem for A) UEs which have failed to decode the L1 signals, and/or B) UEs which are newly attached to the cell."
• "Rel-18 NES capable CONNECTED UE(s) can perform RACH and receive SIBs in non-active duration of cell DTX and/or DRX."
• "UE shall send HARQ feedback for SPS, monitor possible retransmissions for SPS/CG and monitor responses for SR as well even if during non-active period."
• "No reconfiguration of UE DRX is needed upon Cell DTX/DRX activation/deactivation."
• "A common starting point of Cell DTX/DRX pattern in both the network and the UEs side cannot be guaranteed by the baseline proposal (i.e., activated immediately once configured by RRC.)."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.3.4 : Cell selection/re-selection
Entities Concept 1: Barring Legacy UEs Concept 2: NES Techniques Concept 3: Cell Selection Concept 4: Cell Reselection Concept 5: Network Energy Saving (NES) Concept 6: Legacy UE Camping Prevention Concept 7: NES Cell Conditions Concept 8: Work Item (WID) Objectives
Qualcomm Incorporated, T-Mobile US (R2-2302915) Preventing legacy UEs camping, Rel-18 NES mode, blanket cell barring [1, 2] Unclear which NES techniques need barring [1] --- --- Rel-18 network energy saving objectives [1] Need to prevent legacy from camping [1] --- ---
Lenovo (R2-2303247) --- --- Cell selection for NES techniques achieved in RAN2 #120 and RAN2#121 [1, 2] --- --- --- --- ---
CMCC (R2-2303514) --- --- --- Cell barring and reselection discussion for NES [1] New WID for network energy saving for NR approved in RP-223540 [1] --- --- ---
InterDigital (R2-2303601) --- --- --- NES cell selection and resection [1] New work item on network energy saving (NES) approved [1] --- --- ---
NTT DOCOMO INC. (R2-2304070) --- --- Discussion on cell selection [1] --- --- Prevent legacy UEs camping on cells [1] Conditions for desired NES capable UE to be camped in NES cell [1] Network Energy saving (NES) WID RP-223540 agreed in RAN#98-e [1]


TDoc comparison: R2-2303514 (CMCC) R2-2304070 (NTT DOCOMO INC.)

• TDoc R2-2303514 discusses the ability for non-NES UEs to access NES cells if the NES solution is backwards compatible.

Example: "RAN2 confirms that non-NES UEs can access to NES cells if NES solution is backwards compatible."

• This TDoc prioritizes NES cells for NES-capable UEs when network load is high and there are many legacy UEs camping on legacy cells.

Example: "When the network load is relatively high and there are large number of legacy UEs camping on the legacy cells, it should be allowed for the NES capable UEs to consider NES frequency as high priority."

• The TDoc discusses whether NES cells should be prioritized or de-prioritized for intra-frequency cell reselection scenarios.

Example: "For the intra-frequency cell reselection scenario, i.e., NES cells and legacy cells are deployed on the same frequency, whether it should be allowed to prioritize or de-prioritize the NES cell for intra-frequency cell reselection?"

• The TDoc mentions cell barring and cell (re)selection for NES-capable UEs and legacy UEs, but notes that detailed solutions for NES haven't been established.

Example: "Considering the detail solutions for NES haven’t been clear, in this contribution, we only discuss on some high level views on the cell barring and cell (re)selection for NES capable UEs and legacy UEs."

• TDoc R2-2304070 proposes defining conditions for each technology in the cell barred and cell selection/re-selection mechanisms for UEs that only support some of the Rel-18 NES technologies.

Example: "Therefore, if a UE supports only some of the Rel-18 NES technologies as described in ii), it is necessary to define conditions for each technology in the cell barred and cell selection/re-selection mechanisms."

• The TDoc emphasizes the importance of granularity in setting UE capability and conditions to prevent legacy UEs from camping into NES cells.

Example: "Mechanisms to prevent legacy UE from camping into NES cells should be considered along with the granularity of how UE capability defines. RAN2 discuss to be sure about the granularity of setting UE capability and the granularity of setting conditions to the appropriate mechanisms to prevent legacy UE from camping into NES cells."

• The TDoc notes that the network side is expected to apply multiple NES technologies in combination and proposes setting capacities for each technology.

Example: "The network side is expected to apply and operate one or more of the NES technologies in combination. Considering the variety of devices for various applications, it is natural that capacities for NES should be set for each technology."

In summary, the TDocs discuss various technical differences related to the implementation of NES cells and their interaction with legacy UEs. These differences include considerations around cell barring, cell (re)selection, prioritization, and the granularity of UE capability and conditions. The TDocs also note the need for setting capacities for multiple NES technologies.









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.4.1 : Organizational
Entity L1 Measurement RS Configuration PDCCH Ordered RACH for LTM L1/L2-Based Inter-Cell Mobility Security for Selective SCG Activation Inter-DU LTM Execution RRC Reconfiguration
RAN1 (R1-2302194) LS on L1 measurement RS configuration; Fujitsu, CATT contact [R2-2302412] LS on PDCCH ordered RACH for LTM; Fujitsu, CATT contact [R2-2302412]
RAN4 (R4-2303308) Reply LS on L1 intra- and inter-frequency measurement and configurations; CATT contact [R2-2302432]
SA3 (S3-231397) Reply LS on security for selective SCG activation; Nokia contact [R2-2302450]
RAN3 (R3-230889) LS on approaches during execution for inter-DU LTM; Ericsson contact [R2-2302458]
Fujitsu, CATT (R2-2302945) [Draft] Reply LS on L1 measurement RS configuration [R2-2302945] [Draft] Reply LS on PDCCH ordered RACH for LTM [R2-2302945]
Ericsson (R2-2304101) RRC running CR for LTM [R2-2304101]


TDoc comparison: R2-2302412 (RAN1) R2-2302432 (RAN4)

Technical Differences Among TDoc R2-2302412 and R2-2302432:

TDoc R2-2302412:
- Determines whether RAR is received from serving cell or candidate cell
- Specifies the configuration/indication of whether RAR needs to be received
- Allows UE to report support for RAR and without RAR schemes
- Requires sending LS to RAN2 and RAN3 for feasibility checking
- Definition of candidate cells is left up to RAN2

Example snippet: "As the feasibility of schemes included in the agreement above is related to the designs of RAN2 and RAN3, RAN 1 respectfully asks RAN2 and RAN3 to check the feasibility and potential impact on specs of RAN2 and RAN 3 of all options, i.e. with RAR (from serving or candidate cell) and without RAR, in this agreement."

TDoc R2-2302432:
- Discusses the relaxation of restrictions on non-serving cell SSB measurement
- Includes feedback on whether to consider RTD of serving cell and neighbour cell larger than one CP for intra-frequency L1-RSRP measurement
- Discusses the scenarios and requirements for L1-RSRP measurement for those scenarios

Example snippet: "Whether to consider RTD of serving cell and neighbour cell larger than one CP for intra-frequency L1-RSRP measurement? At least in some scenarios, the SSB for intra-frequency L1 measurement may not be covered by serving cell active BWP."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302945 (Fujitsu, CATT) R2-2302946 (Fujitsu, CATT)

- TDoc R2-2302945 discusses how to handle unnecessary information in RAR and how to avoid potential preamble confliction.
- In case additional information is introduced, legacy RAR cannot be used, and RAN2 needs to discuss the format of the RAR and the UE behavior to receive it.
- RAN2 also needs to discuss how to maintain the TA of the candidate cell at the UE side and whether any specific handling is necessary to avoid interruption in data transmission.
- TDoc R2-2302946 analyzes the potential specs impact for Case B, which includes discussing the format of RAR and UE behavior to receive it if additional information is introduced.
- The legacy RAR can be used if additional information is not introduced.
- The preambles used for LTM in the candidate DU may be different from the serving DU in the inter-DU case.

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2302945:
- "Although RAN2 needs to discuss how to handle unnecessary information (e.g., UL grant, Temporary C-RNTI) in RAR and specify the result of the discussion, spec impact may be smaller than the former case."
- "RAN2 needs to discuss how to avoid potential preamble confliction and specify the result of the discussion."
- "RAN2 needs to discuss the format of the RAR and the UE behavior to receive the RAR if the additional information is introduced."
- "RAN2 needs to discuss whether the caused data transmission interruption at the source is acceptable or any specific handling is necessary to avoid it."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2302946:
- "Irrespective of whether the RAR is received from the serving cell or the candidate cell, at least the following aspects needs to be discussed in RAN2 and will be potential RAN2 specs impact."
- "RAN2 needs to discuss the format of the RAR and the UE behavior to receive the RAR if the additional information is introduced."
- "The legacy RAR can be used if the additional information is not introduced."
- "For inter-DU case, the preambles used for LTM in the candidate DU may be different from the serving DU."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302450 (SA3) R2-2302458 (RAN3)

Technical differences between the two TDocs include:

TDoc R2-2302450:

- The focus is on the handling of sk-counter/S-KgNB in scenarios where a UE is connected to multiple Serving Networks (SNs)
- RAN2 is requesting feedback from SA3 regarding the acceptability of the existing handling of sk-counter/S-KgNB in these scenarios
- If SA3 finds the existing handling not acceptable, RAN2 is asking for requirements for a solution

Example snippet: "RAN2 would like to know whether SA3 considers the existing handling of sk-counter/ S-KgNB in the above scenarios acceptable"

TDoc R2-2302458:

- The focus is on supporting inter-DU LTM cell switch during execution in 5G networks
- RAN3 is discussing two approaches to support this, and is asking for feedback from RAN2 on which approach to use
- RAN3 is also open to suggestions for other possibilities

Example snippet: "RAN3 kindly asks RAN2 to provide the feedback on the above approaches"

Overall, TDoc R2-2302450 is focused on security considerations related to a UE being connected to multiple SNs, while TDoc R2-2302458 is focused on technical approaches for supporting inter-DU LTM cell switch.









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.4.2.1 : General and Stage-2
Entity L1 Measurement LTM Procedure Failure Handling UE Identification RACH-less LTM Early TA Acquisition Security Impacts
NEC Support LTM with L1 measurement (R2-2302484) LTM execution in inter-DU scenarios (R2-2302485) Failure handling for L1/L2 triggered mobility (R2-2302485) UE identification during LTM cell switch (R2-2302486)
CATT Applicable scenarios and procedure (R2-2302508) Discussion on RACH-less LTM (R2-2302507)
Futurewei Combined triggering of mobility changes and RACH-less in sequential LTM (R2-2302605)
Rakuten Symphony RACH-less handover for L1/L2 triggered mobility (R2-2302766) Security impacts of inter gNB-DU LTM (R2-2302731)
Intel Corporation Discussion on RACH-less LTM (R2-2302752) Early TA acquisition (R2-2302750)
vivo Remaining issues on LTM procedures (R2-2302804)
Qualcomm Inc. Early TA acquisition for LTM (R2-2302829)
Fujitsu LTM procedure for different scenarios (R2-2303008)


TDoc comparison: R2-2303751 (LG Electronics) R2-2303940 (LG Electronics Inc.) R2-2304102 (Ericsson) R2-2304185 (NTT DOCOMO INC.)

1. Candidate cells can be grouped to share the same TA value for RACH-less LTM.
- TDoc R2-2303751: "TAs of candidate cells for a UE can be grouped with multiple TAGs."

2. In RACH-based LTM execution, the UE may transmit an RA preamble indicated in the pre-configuration.
- TDoc R2-2303751: "The physical channel configurations included in the pre-configuration are not reserved for the UE and can be used for UEs served by the candidate cell or a new UE, which needs to move into the cell by mobility, until the UE executes a cell switch to the candidate cell."

3. If RAR is received from the candidate cell for intra DU cell switch, one DU needs to transmit RAR on both SpCell and the candidate cell.
- TDoc R2-2303940: "If RAR is received from the candidate cell for intra DU cell switch, this breaks the legacy rule for reception of RAR and one DU needs to transmit RAR on both SpCell and the candidate cell."

4. The serving DU can include dynamic information set by the target DU in the LTM cell switch command.
- TDoc R2-2304102: "Examples of such dynamic information about target cell to further reduce the latency are: Beam information, such as information enabling the UE to determine the TCI state(s) to be activated in the target cell during the LTM cell switch. SCell activation/deactivation state in the target."

5. The RACH configuration for the candidate cell needs to be prepared separately from the RACH configuration for the serving cell to execute early UL sync.
- TDoc R2-2304185: "Observation3: To execute early UL sync, the RACH configuration for the candidate cell needs to be prepared separately from the RACH configuration for the serving cell."

TDoc comparison: R2-2303650 (Lenovo) R2-2303709 (Interdigital, Inc.) R2-2303754 (MediaTek Inc.) R2-2303869 (Samsung)

Technical Differences among TDocs:

1. Option for CU to request DU to reserve required PRACH/UL RS resources for the UE in first-RRC-Reconfiguration
- The CU can request the corresponding candidate DU to reserve required PRACH/UL RS resources for the UE.
- "which is then provided by the source DU to the UE in first-RRC-Reconfiguration"
- PDCCH ordered DCI may contain a corresponding index indicating candidate cell(s) for which the Early TA needs to be acquired.
- "Here the First-RRC-Reconfiguration contains: a list of candidate cells Random Access Preamble indices and indication of RACH occasions with the associated SSB indices for each candidate cell"

2. Pre-configuring candidates using RRC in the LTM preparation phase may not be sufficient
- "pre-configuring one or a selected few candidates using RRC in the LTM preparation phase may not be sufficient"
- RAN2 to discuss other LTM execution triggers that can be used such as RLF, HOF, BFD
- UE performs L3 measurements and reports the neighbor cells which are above a threshold.

3. Data Loss at LTM cell switch
- In option 1, for DL data transfer, the DU can check the HARQ status for each HARQ process and figure out whether the corresponding RLC SDUs/segments are successfully delivered or not at LTM cell switch.
- The opposite option is to minimize the ping-pong rates and reduce cell switch execution number as basic handover procedure by setting longer TTT or introducing additional L1-RSRP threshold for cell switch.

4. Adaptive gap configurations to reduce interruption towards source cell
- To reduce the interruption towards source cell, the gNB can perform adaptive gap configurations.
- The gNB can configure different gaps for different target cells.
- The UE may perform DL synchronization with the candidate cell during the measurement.

Example snippets from the original TDocs:

1. [TDoc R2-2303650]
- "which is then provided by the source DU to the UE in first-RRC-Reconfiguration"
- "Here the First-RRC-Reconfiguration contains: a list of candidate cells Random Access Preamble indices and indication of RACH occasions with the associated SSB indices for each candidate cell"
- "PDCCH ordered DCI may contain a corresponding index indicating candidate cell(s) for which the Early TA needs to be acquired."

2. [TDoc R2-2303709]
- "pre-configuring one or a selected few candidates using RRC in the LTM preparation phase may not be sufficient"
- "UE performs L3 measurements and reports the neighbor cells which are above a threshold."

3. [TDoc R2-2303754]
- "In option 1, for DL data transfer, the DU can check the HARQ status for each HARQ process and figure out whether the corresponding RLC SDUs/segments are successfully delivered or not at LTM cell switch."
- "The opposite option is to minimize the ping-pong rates and reduce cell switch execution number as basic handover procedure by setting longer TTT or introducing additional L1-RSRP threshold for cell switch."

4. [TDoc R2-2303869]
- "To reduce the interruption towards source cell, the gNB can perform adaptive gap configurations."
- "The gNB can configure different gaps for different target cells."
- "The UE may perform DL synchronization with the candidate cell during the measurement."

TDoc comparison: R2-2304103 (Ericsson) R2-2304104 (Ericsson)

Summary of Technical Differences:

TDoc R2-2304103:

- Study of both gNB scheduled and/or UE initiated report
- Baseline for obtaining RS measurement configuration for L1 measurements from ServingCellConfigCommon of each candidate
- Configuration options for L1 measurement RS provided under ServingCellConfig for serving cells
- L1 inter-frequency measurement supported from RAN1 point of view outside CellGroupConfig for Rel-18 LTM

Example Snippet: "Option 1) Configurations for L1 measurement RS is provided under ServingCellConfig for the serving cells - is useful to reuses the mechanism for Rel-17 ICBM and necessary information to support inter-frequency measurement will be added there."

TDoc R2-2304104:

- Legacy random access involves UE transmitting preamble and expecting RAR within RAR window
- C-DU calculates TA value associated with preamble and transmits to CU, which provides to S-DU
- Approach 2 allows for possibility of C-DU response including TA value
- CU may include request for configuring LTM candidate cell and initiating time alignment acquisition procedure associated with requested LTM candidate cell(s)

Example Snippet: "Assuming that the CU is aware which LTM candidate cells are UL sync or not with the UE’s current serving cell, the CU may also include in the UE CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST to a C-DU the request for configuring an LTM candidate cell and a request for initiating a time alignment acquisition procedure associated to the requested LTM candidate cell(s)."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.4.2.2 : RRC
Entity RRC Aspects Configuration Handling L1 Measurements Candidate Cell Configuration Race Conditions Delta Configuration
CATT [Ref R2-2302552] RRC aspects for LTM, remaining issues - - - - - -
Futurewei [Ref R2-2302606] - Sequential LTM, RACH-less, delta configuration Configuration and handling - CellGroupConfig IE - -
Intel Corporation [Ref R2-2302732] - Reference configuration, RRC modelling - - - - -
Panasonic [Ref R2-2302754] - - - L1 measurement configuration for LTM - - -
vivo [Ref R2-2302805] - Reference configuration - - Candidate cell configuration for LTM - -
Qualcomm Inc. [Ref R2-2302830] - - - - - Race conditions in LTM, inter-DU LTM, RRC message delivery -
Huawei, HiSilicon [Ref R2-2302876] RRC aspects for LTM Delta signalling, LTM reference configuration - - - - -
Fujitsu [Ref R2-2303009] - Reference configuration, candidate target configuration - - - - -
NEC [Ref R2-2303355] - - - - - - Delta configurations, compliance check
Xiaomi [Ref R2-2303847] - Candidate configuration, reference configuration, compliance check - - - - -
Sharp [Ref R2-2304071] - RRC Configurations for LTM, reference configuration, delta configuration - - - - -


TDoc comparison: R2-2302552 (CATT) R2-2302606 (Futurewei) R2-2302732 (Intel Corporation) R2-2302805 (vivo) R2-2302876 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303025 (OPPO) R2-2303166 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303220 (Lenovo) R2-2303347 (Xiaomi) R2-2303355 (NEC) R2-2303392 (Apple) R2-2303395 (Apple)

- The LTM is intended to enable fast cell switch with low interruption, limiting the scenarios to intra-DU and intra-CU inter-DU cases only.
- UE should not apply the legacy principle for the need code or toAddModeList/toRelaseList when applying the candidate configuration upon LTM cell switch.
- L1 measurement reporting configurations for LTM should be configured within each candidate and serving cell configuration.
- The TA network adjustment factor is determined by the CU and configured to the UE through RRC LTM pre-configuration.
- The reference configuration is managed separately and cannot be one of the configured candidate cells or serving cells.
- Option 3 incorporates the L1 measurement configuration within each candidate cell configuration, and early decoding for the candidate cell RRC configuration is needed to obtain the corresponding L1 measurement configuration.
- At LTM execution, the reference and the candidate delta configuration will completely override top-level fields that can be included in the LTM candidate configuration.
- The set of candidate cell index shall be common among different groups to avoid additional signalling overhead for the need to include group index in cell switch MAC CE.
- If the candidate configuration of the target cell and the candidate configuration of the source cell belongs to the same candidate configuration set, the UE applies partial MAC reset and keeps RLC and PDCP.
- RAN2 to discuss whether multiple reference configurations can be configured in inter-DU LTM with a restriction that there is at most one per DU.
- RAN2 to agree that if the reference configuration is the source configuration, the network can send an indication to do so, instead of sending the reference configuration.
- RAN2 to modify the RRC re-establishment with LTM procedure to make use of the fact that the CU does not change in case the recovery is using a candidate LTM cell.

TDoc comparison: R2-2302754 (Panasonic) R2-2303009 (Fujitsu) R2-2303062 (MediaTek Inc.) R2-2304071 (Sharp)

- The gNB-DU is responsible for preparing the CellGroupConfig and mapping between CSI report and RS configurations.
- RS configurations of all candidate cells need to be sent from gNB-CU to all gNB-DUs in order for them to update the CSI-MeasConfig as long as one new candidate cell is added or RS configuration is changed in any of the existing candidate cells.
- UE needs to decode all RRCReconfigurations (containing CellGroupConfigs) in the candidate cell configuration to obtain the full picture of RS configurations.
- The requirement of sequential cell switch needs to be understood before comparing different options of L1 measurement configuration.
- The CellGroupConfig for each candidate cell contains RS configurations of all candidate cells and mapping between the report configuration and RS configurations.
- The first option is to reuse the signaling structure of Rel-17 ICBM (see Option 1).
- LTM candidate configurations for intra-CU mobility are invalid if inter-CU handover is triggered for the UE configured with them.
- Compliance check for conditional reconfiguration can be performed upon the reception or upon CHO/CPA/CPC execution, and the gNB cannot identify which candidate configuration is invalid and may provide the same configuration.
- In the LTM procedure, the gNB decides to use LTM and initiates LTM candidate preparation by transmitting an RRCReconfiguration message to the UE.
- One RRCReconfiguration message for each candidate configuration is used for LTM candidate cell configurations.
- The method for Rel-17 Inter-cell Beam Management (ICBM) can be reused for inter-frequency measurement.
- Information of candidate cells required before LTM cell switch is provided in candidate configuration if UE is allowed to access parameters that are not in its current serving cell configurations.
- Legacy handover is a reconfigurationWithSync procedure and requires synchronization towards the target cell.
- Candidate delta configuration is applied on top of the reference configuration to form a complete candidate configuration.
- One RRCReconfiguration message for each candidate target configuration is used to configure target candidate cells.
- The candidate delta configuration is applied on top of the reference configuration to form a complete candidate configuration when the UE receives the LTM configuration (before the LTM cell switch).

TDoc comparison: R2-2303426 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2303711 (Interdigital, Inc.) R2-2303843 (LG Electronics France) R2-2304105 (Ericsson)

Technical Differences among TDoc:

1. Alt.2 and Alt.3: In Alt.2 and Alt.3, the UE can identify whether a full Layer 2 reset is required or not based on the LTM candidate configuration ID included in the cell switch command. The UE can also perform the compliance check upon receiving the reference configuration to reduce the configuration handling delay during LTM execution. However, Alt.3 is similar to Alt.2, and it focuses on improving the RRC Resume procedure by indicating the configuration ID in RRC Resume to trigger LTM towards the current cell in Msg4.

2. Use of Reference Configuration: The use of reference configuration is limited, and it is likely that candidate configurations are similar to each other and to the original cell. However, LTM candidate configurations are still valid after resuming the connection, even if the UE has performed some cell reselection in the meantime (within a limited area). Therefore, the UE needs to indicate updates of the valid cells using uplink signaling.

3. Role of a Cell in Different LTM Events: Depending on which candidate cell is chosen as LTM target, a cell may play a role as SpCell or SCell after LTM to the candidate cell. To support different roles of a cell in different/subsequent LTM events, the reference configuration should be able to include both SpCellConfig and SCellConfig even for the same cell.

4. Case on When the Reference Configuration is the Current UE Configuration: If the reference configuration is the current UE configuration, this can be achieved by two different solutions. In one solution, the network will send a reference configuration to the UE containing a configuration that is exactly the same as the current UE configuration. In the other solution, the UE will consider a joint RLM process where it not only monitors the status of its serving cell but also the status of the configured candidate cells for LTM.

Example Snippets from the Original TDoc:

1. "In Alt. 2, the UE can also identify whether the full L2 reset is required or not, based on the LTM candidate configuration ID included in the cell switch command..."

2. "...the NW can provide full candidate configuration or delta candidate configuration based on the current UE configuration, i.e. the configuration used when receiving the RRC message."

3. "While this approach may save on downlink signaling, it requires the UE to indicate updates of the valid cells using uplink signaling."

4. "Depending on which candidate cell (cell_B) is chosen as LTM target, the cell_A may play a role as be SpCell or SCell after LTM to the candidate cell_B..."

5. "If now the case on when the reference configuration is the current UE configuration is allowed, this basically can be achieved according to two different solutions..."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302831 (Qualcomm Inc.) R2-2303592 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303847 (Xiaomi)

- Two options for L1 measurements and reporting of a deactivated SCell that is a candidate LTM cell: Option 1: UE follows same configuration for deactivated SCell as when activated. Option 2: UE follows LTM-specific configuration for deactivated SCell.
- Option 2 may result in dynamically dependent L1 report payloads, so CSI report configuration may include pointer to both CSI-resource configuration of serving cell and L1 measurement RS configuration for SSBs of candidate LTM cell.
- Providing UE with additional LTM-specific measurement and reporting configurations of serving PCell for being a candidate LTM cell becomes redundant.
- Release of RRC configurations in UE can be decided by CU, serving DU, or target DU.
- Usage of same BWP between source and target reduces interruption time, but if BWP changes in source, target cell needs to be notified, at least for RACH-less scenarios.
- Option 1 is less flexible for configuration management than option 2.
- When one candidate configuration is updated, the associated complete candidate configuration with the same configuration ID in the UE should be updated.
- Complete candidate configuration of LTM and associated configuration ID should be stored by UE when it receives LTM candidate configuration and generates it.

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2302831:

- "Option 2 may create the issue that the payload of the L1 report may become dynamically dependent on the activation/deactivation state(s) of the one or more SCells."
- "Therefore, providing the UE with additional LTM-specific measurement and reporting configurations of the serving PCell for being a candidate LTM cell becomes redundant."
- "Therefore, the CSI report configuration associated with the report instance may include a pointer to both a CSI-resource configuration of a serving cell and the L1 measurement RS configuration for the SSBs of a candidate LTM cell."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303592:

- "Usage of the same BWP between the source and the target reduces the interruption time."
- "but in case the BWP changes in the source, it requires the target cell to be notified, at least for the RACH-less scenario."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303847:

- "Compared with option 2, option 1 is not flexible for configuration management."
- "When one candidate configuration is updated, the associated complete candidate configuration with the same configuration ID in the UE should be updated."









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.4.2.3 : Cell Switch
Entity Dynamic Cell Switch LTM Triggering MAC CE Partial MAC Reset Timer Supervision BWP Upon Cell Switch Resources for RA Early TA Management Security Issues
CATT Open issues discussion (R2-2302509) Content discussion (R2-2302509) - Timer-supervised LTM (R2-2302509) - - - -
Samsung Cell switching aspects (R2-2302592) - MAC reset upon cell switch (R2-2302592) - BWP upon cell switch (R2-2302591) Resources for RA upon reception of Cell Switch Command (R2-2302592) Early Timing Advance Management for LTM (R2-2302591) -
Futurewei Dynamic switch for L1/L2 mobility (R2-2302607) - - - - - - -
Intel Corporation Discussion on LTM cell switch (R2-2302733) L1/2 mobility trigger information in MAC CE (R2-2302733) - - - - - -
vivo - L2 Reset and triggering MAC CE for LTM (R2-2302806) Partial MAC reset issue (R2-2302806) - - - - -
Qualcomm Dynamic switch in LTM (R2-2302832) - L2 reset at LTM execution (R2-2302832) - - - - -
Huawei, HiSilicon Cell switch solutions and L2 behaviors in LTM (R2-2302877) - - - - - - -
OPPO Open issues on dynamic switching (R2-2303026) Contents of LTM cell switch command (R2-2303026) Partial MAC reset, further studies needed (R2-2303026) - - - - -
NEC Futher discussion on Cell switch (R2-2303356) - MAC reset issue discussion (R2-2303356) - - - - -
Lenovo - - - - - - Details of Early TA work (R2-2303649) Securing LTM, PCI leakage issue (R2-2303651)


TDoc comparison: R2-2302509 (CATT) R2-2302591 (Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd) R2-2302592 (Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd) R2-2302607 (Futurewei) R2-2302832 (Qualcomm Inc.) R2-2302877 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303345 (FGI) R2-2303349 (Xiaomi) R2-2303356 (NEC) R2-2303537 (CMCC) R2-2303593 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303649 (Lenovo)

1. Intra-DU LTM: The DU can easily implement LTM without inter-node interaction by including the preamble information of the target cell in the LTM triggering MAC CE. (TDoc R2-2302509)

2. Partial MAC reset: The handling of HARQ process during partial MAC reset is agreed to not continue the HARQ process of the source cell in the scenario of intra-DU LTM. (TDoc R2-2302509)

3. Early TA management: Identity of candidate cell configuration is signaled in PDCCH order to identify the candidate cell for which UE initiates the procedure for early TA management. (TDoc R2-2302591)

4. Inter-DU scenario: Interaction between the serving cell and candidate cell is needed for other purposes in the inter-DU scenario, such as getting the TA value to be indicated in the cell switch command. (TDoc R2-2302592)

5. RACH-less LTM: In RACH-less LTM, the first transmission between the UE and target cell should not be a DL transmission in the inter-DU scenario, and if the UE's first UL transmission is dynamically scheduled by the source cell, it doesn't work in the inter-DU scenario. (TDoc R2-2302832)

6. Failure detection: The network and the UE can determine whether the TA to the target cell is valid or not by checking the corresponding timeAlignmentTimer when the LTM cell switch is performed. (TDoc R2-2303345)

7. LTM timer: RAN2 needs to confirm whether RLC re-establishment and PDCP data recovery are required when partial MAC reset is applied. (TDoc R2-2303356)

8. Delta configuration: The candidate delta configuration is applied on top of the reference configuration to form a complete candidate configuration when the UE receives the LTM configuration before the LTM cell switch. (TDoc R2-2303537)

9. Security aspect: MAC CEs are neither ciphered nor integrity protected, so the protection of the LTM command is a relevant aspect to consider to avoid DoS attacks. (TDoc R2-2303593)

10. Early TA acquisition: Early TA acquisition for all candidate cells included in the first RRC Reconfiguration message is wasteful for UE battery and might interrupt ongoing data transmission/reception with the source cell. (TDoc R2-2303649)

TDoc comparison: R2-2302733 (Intel Corporation) R2-2303065 (Samsung) R2-2303474 (Transsion Holdings) R2-2303575 (Spreadtrum Communications)

Technical differences among the TDocs:

1. R2 assumes that at L1L2 cell switch, the UE reset and recovery procedures are explicitly controlled by the network. Two options for cell configuration are provided, with Option 1 being a list of cells and Option 2 being separate configurations for serving and candidate cells. PDCP re-establishment is not needed in Option 1, which reduces interruption time for LTM.

2. R2 proposes two options for providing configurations for L1 measurement RS, with Option 1 being provided using csi-MeasConfig IE and necessary information added for inter-frequency measurement, and Option 2 being provided separately from ServingCellConfig for serving cells and CellGroupConfig for candidate cells. Proposals include allowing a cell with additional PCI for ICBM to be configured as a candidate cell for LTM and introducing security protection in LTM MAC CE.

3. R2 proposes reusing the legacy L3-similar measurement mechanism for LTM to avoid ping-pong, with some enhancement needed to reduce latency. Proposal 4 suggests grouping candidate and serving cells by DU for the UE to apply differential parameter to balance ping-pong rates and latency.

4. For the case of intra-DU, all cells share the same MAC, RLC, and PDCP stacks. L2 reset for MAC, RLC, and PDCP should be configured separately within one candidate cell. Proposal 1 suggests notifying the acquired TA to the source cell before cell switch.

Example snippets from the original TDocs:

- "Whether the UE performs partial or full MAC reset (FFS what partial reset is, e.g. to avoid data loss), re-establish RLC, perform data recovery with PDCP is explicitly controlled by the network." [R2-2302733]
- "Option 1: list of cells: In this option, network configures list of cells that belong to the same DU. In addition, PDCP re-establishment is also not needed which would reduce interruption time for LTM." [R2-2302733]
- "Proposal 1: The cell with additional PCI for ICBM can be configured as a candidate cell for LTM." [R2-2303065]
- "Proposal 4: The candidate cells and serving cell can be grouped by DU for UE to apply differential parameter to make a trade-off between ping-pong rates and latency." [R2-2303474]
- "Concerned with the flexibility of L2 reset for different scenarios, within one candidate cell, L2 reset for MAC, RLC and PDCP should be configured separately." [R2-2303575]

TDoc comparison: R2-2303651 (Lenovo) R2-2303752 (LG Electronics) R2-2303929 (ASUSTeK) R2-2304106 (Ericsson)

Technical differences among the following TDoc can be summarized as follows:

1. Use of L3 based measurement reporting and legacy ReconfigurationWithSync for triggering mobility execution.
- "If the UE needs to report measurement result for a detected cell (i.e., for which PCI was not indicated in the RRC Reconfiguration), the same is done using L3 based measurement reporting and legacy ReconfigurationWithSync is used for triggering mobility execution." (TDoc R2-2303651)

2. Configuration of UE with multiple LTM timer values for various LTM execution types.
- "The simple way to resolve the above problem is that the UE is configured with multiple LTM timer values for various LTM execution type (e.g. RACH-based or RACH-less executions), and the UE applies the LTM timer value corresponding to the LTM execution type." (TDoc R2-2303752)

3. Use of UL signal for executing RACH-less LTM and starting/stopping T304 timer.
- "In order for the UE to execute RACH-less LTM, the UE transmits an UL signal, e.g., Scheduling Request, Cell Switch Complete MAC CE, or RRCReconfigurationComplete, to the target cell." (TDoc R2-2303752)
- "Similar to legacy handover, the UE starts the LTM timer upon receiving a mobility command from the NW, where the mobility command may be a MAC CE (e.g., Cell Switch MAC CE) because RAN2 agreed that the MAC CE is used for LTM triggering of the cell switch. Then, the UE stops T304 upon the successful reception of a PDCCH addressed to C-RNTI." (TDoc R2-2303752)

4. Use of timer supervising LTM to detect failure for RACH-based and RACH-less LTM.
- "Proposal 3: A timer supervising LTM could be used to detect failure for RACH-based and RACH-less LTM: the timer is started when receiving a MAC CE triggering LTM the timer is stopped when the LTM is successfully completed When the timer expires, the procedure is not likely to succeed in the target Cell." (TDoc R2-2303929)

5. Fallback to RACH-based LTM for RACH-less LTM when quality of the beam is lower than a threshold.
- "Proposal 5: For RACH-less LTM, the UE falls back to RACH-based LTM in the target Cell when quality of the beam, indicated by the MAC CE triggering LTM, is lower than a threshold." (TDoc R2-2303929)

6. Application of dynamic information received with LTM cell switch command by MAC and physical layer.
- "As response to receiving the indication from RRC, MAC and the physical layer can now continue to apply the dynamic information received with the LTM cell switch command" (TDoc R2-2304106)
- "The MAC layer may now, for example, apply a TA value for the target cell received with the LTM cell switch command." (TDoc R2-2304106)
- "The RRC layer continues with the LTM cell switch procedure, for instance, it may configure the lower layers with parameters, e.g. parameters included in the LTM candidate cell configuration." (TDoc R2-2304106)
- "The LTM cell switch command contains a pointer to one of the previously configured LTM candidate cell configurations in the RRC layer, while the beam indication is mainly used to configure the physical layer during the switch." (TDoc R2-2304106)
- "The RRC layer indicates to lower layers to apply the dynamic information received with the LTM cell switch command, as the LTM candidate cell configuration has now been applied." (TDoc R2-2304106)
- "The MAC layer indicates, to the RRC layer in the UE that an LTM cell switch procedure is executed and forwards the LTM candidate cell configuration identity." (TDoc R2-2304106)

7. Introduction of a new type of indication for LTM cell switch procedure.
- "The RRC layer indicates to lower layers to apply the dynamic information received with the LTM cell switch command, as the LTM candidate cell configuration has now been applied. The MAC layer indicates, to the RRC layer in the UE that an LTM cell switch procedure is executed and forwards the LTM candidate cell configuration identity. UE transmits the RRCReconfigurationComplete message. This is a new type of indication." (TDoc R2-2304106)

Example snippets from the original TDoc that support the difference highlighting have been provided in the bullet points above.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303277 (KDDI Corporation) R2-2303473 (Transsion Holdings) R2-2303759 (MediaTek Inc.) R2-2304072 (Sharp)

- A new framework for beam management that considers serving and target cells is being discussed, and beam management during partial MAC reset should not be considered separately from the discussion of RAN1.
- RAN2 has agreed not to maintain triggered consistent LBT failure and LBT_COUNTER through partial MAC reset for both intra-DU and inter-DU scenarios.
- There were discussions on whether to flush DL HARQ soft buffer and set uplink HARQ processed to value 0 during RAN2#121, but there were concerns about HARQ continuation in terms of network implementation.
- RAN2 agrees not to discuss beam failure detection and recovery separately from the overall framework discussion for beam management.
- Reference signal configuration can be indicated in RRC pre-configuration during LTM cell switch if it reuses the legacy L3 handover procedure.
- Scell activation during LTM cell switch can be indicated in RRC pre-configuration using sCellState in CellGroupConfig.
- For PDCCH-order based RACH for TA measurement for candidate cells, legacy CBRA is not supported.
- UE should not initiate re-transmit PRACH when reception of RAR is not configured/indicated during LTM cell switch.
- The procedures of MAC functions relying on cell-specific configuration and control need to be stopped or cancelled during LTM cell switch.
- UL TA with candidate cell(s) should be maintained until the cell switch command is received to reduce handover interruption and latency.
- The ongoing consistent LBT failure should be cancelled during LTM cell switch due to the change in serving cell.
- SCell activation/deactivation can be indicated in RRC pre-configuration or by sCellState as legacy, but this may not be sufficient for data volume when LTM MAC CE is received.
- NDI for UL HARQ processes should be set to 0 if HARQ procedures are not reset during CA cell swap case.
- Whether the timer for LTM cell switch can be maintained upon partial MAC reset should be discussed to avoid additional latency.









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.4.4 : CHO including target MCG and candidate SCGs for CPC CPA in NR-DC


TDoc comparison: R2-2302751 (Intel Corporation) R2-2302808 (vivo) R2-2302935 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2303167 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2303221 (Lenovo) R2-2303551 (Huawei, HiSilicon)

- For a UE in dual-connectivity mode, it performs measurements of candidate PCells and candidate PSCells simultaneously, and checks if the execution conditions for both CHO and CPC are met.
- The role of network nodes, signaling structure of CHO including CPC, and UE behavior in the execution phase need to be discussed for the simultaneous evaluation of CHO and CPC.
- The same designs of role of network nodes, RRC signaling structure, and UE behavior in execution phase can be reused as much as possible for CHO including CPA.
- For each candidate PSCell, the information of frequency and PCI, and CPC execution condition are configured.
- The UE can start to evaluate the execution condition of CPAC when the enter condition of the measurement event associated with the CHO has been satisfied for 60ms, i.e. CHO evaluation is not always concurrent with CPAC evaluation.
- The UE should always evaluate the execution condition of both CHO and CPAC, i.e. CHO evaluation is always concurrent with CPAC evaluation.
- It is left to UE implementation to determine when to start CPAC evaluation concurrently with CHO evaluation.
- If there is no CPAC execution conditions are fulfilled after CHO execution conditions are fulfilled for a certain time, is UE allowed to perform CHO only without SCG?
- The UE may not always perform concurrent evaluation on all the configured CHO and CPAC, e.g. due to limited UE capability.
- Candidate MN includes the suggested set of PSCells for the candidate SN to consider configuring, UE measurement results, CPC indicator, CHO indicator, indicating to the candidate SN that the procedure to configure multiple candidate PSCells is part of a CHO procedure, source SN UE XnAP ID, source SCG configuration in SN Addition Request.
- Candidate MN generates the execution condition parameters and provides them to the source MN in Handover Request Acknowledge along with the candidate target PSCell IDs.
- Source MN determines the execution conditions for the candidate target PCells.
- RAN2 needs to discuss the maximum total number of candidate target cells (PCells and PSCells) that can be configured to a UE during the preparation procedure.
- The UE should control the radio status of PSCell access condition before determining to access the target PSCell along the target PCell as the target PSCell radio status may change until the PSCell access condition holds.
- UE has the PSCell access condition in source configuration and does not need to decode the nested conditional configuration in order to measure for PSCell access.
- If the UE is unable to comply with (part of) the configuration included in the RRCReconfiguration message for CHO and CPC, the UE continues to use the configuration used prior to when the inability to comply with the RRCReconfiguration message was detected.
- If the condition for CPAC is not met until CHO has completed, UE should stop evaluating the condition for CPAC or release the candidate SCG configuration.
- Target MN is responsible for generating the execution condition for CPAC.
- When performing the evaluation of the candidate PSCells for CHO with candidate SCG for CPA/CPC, the UE uses the measurement configuration of the MCG which is generated by the source MN so the source MN should provide the execution conditions for all the possible candidate target PSCells.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303567 (Spreadtrum Communications) R2-2303626 (Interdigital Inc.) R2-2303794 (CMCC) R2-2303870 (Samsung)

Technical Differences among TDocs:

1. Proposal for reusing configuration when the same candidate PSCell is selected by different potential MN in CHO with CPAC in NR-DC. (TDoc R2-2303567)
- "Proposal 1: If the same candidate PSCell is selected by different potential MN, the same configuration can be reused."

2. UE allowed to perform another PSCell change based on preconfigured PSCells' configuration when first CPAC execution fails and the target PCell is not changed in CHO with CPAC. (TDoc R2-2303567)
- "Proposal 2: The UE is allowed to perform another PSCell change based on the preconfigured PSCells’ configuration when first CPAC execution fails and the target PCell is not changed in CHO with CPAC."

3. Considerations for UE's ability to keep using the current SCG configuration in CHO without the associated SCG. (TDoc R2-2303626)
- "Observation 1: Waiting for the CPC conditions to be fulfilled after the CHO conditions get fulfilled, without executing the CHO, may lead to RLF."
- "Proposal 5: If the UE cannot keep the current SCG configuration after the CHO execution, the CPC configuration associated with the CHO is released."

4. Rationality behind source node generating execution condition for CHO, target MCG generating execution condition for CPA and MCG configurations, and target SCG generating SCG configurations in CHO including target MCG and candidate SCGs for CPA. (TDoc R2-2303794)
- "Proposal 7: The UE behaviour considering different combination of CHO and CPA execution condition status can be defined as following: If both the execution condition of one target Pcell and the execution condition of one Pscell associated with the target Pcell are satisfied, the UE executes the CHO and related CPA to both target MCG and target SCG."

5. Simultaneous evaluation of CHO and CPA/CPC execution conditions and selection of target PCell and associated PSCell for execution in CHO with CPAC. (TDoc R2-2303870)
- "Proposal 6: In simultaneous evaluation, when CHO execution condition is fulfilled, and the CPA/CPC execution condition is also fulfilled, UE will select the target PCell and the associated PSCell to execute CHO and CPA/CPC simultaneously."
- "Proposal 7: In simultaneous evaluation, when CHO execution condition is fulfilled without associated candidate PSCell fulfilled CPA/CPC execution condition, UE will firstly select the target PCell to perform CHO, and keep evaluating the associated candidate PSCells of the target PCell."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303567:
- "Proposal 1: If the same candidate PSCell is selected by different potential MN, the same configuration can be reused."
- "Proposal 2: The UE is allowed to perform another PSCell change based on the preconfigured PSCells’ configuration when first CPAC execution fails and the target PCell is not changed in CHO with CPAC."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303626:
- "Observation 1: Waiting for the CPC conditions to be fulfilled after the CHO conditions get fulfilled, without executing the CHO, may lead to RLF."
- "Proposal 5: If the UE cannot keep the current SCG configuration after the CHO execution, the CPC configuration associated with the CHO is released."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303794:
- "Proposal 7: The UE behaviour considering different combination of CHO and CPA execution condition status can be defined as following: If both the execution condition of one target Pcell and the execution condition of one Pscell associated with the target Pcell are satisfied, the UE executes the CHO and related CPA to both target MCG and target SCG."

Example snippets from TDoc R2-2303870:
- "Proposal 6: In simultaneous evaluation, when CHO execution condition is fulfilled, and the CPA/CPC execution condition is also fulfilled, UE will select the target PCell and the associated PSCell to execute CHO and CPA/CPC simultaneously."
- "Proposal 7: In simultaneous evaluation, when CHO execution condition is fulfilled without associated candidate PSCell fulfilled CPA/CPC execution condition, UE will firstly select the target PCell to perform CHO, and keep evaluating the associated candidate PSCells of the target PCell."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302809 (vivo) R2-2303681 (Ericsson) R2-2303849 (Xiaomi)

- The TDoc discusses the process of triggering a CHO (handover) procedure, where the UE detaches from the S-MN, applies stored configuration for the selected candidate cell, synchronizes to that cell, and completes the RRC handover procedure by sending a message to the T-MN.
- The source MN (S-MN) may consider MR-DC resource status and the limitation of CPAC conditional candidate to decide whether to allow CHO with CPAC or not.
- The UE confirms the reception of the RRCReconfiguration message by sending an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the source MN, which does not include a contained RRCReconfigurationComplete message to T-MN or T-SN.
- The S-SN sends the Secondary RAT Data Usage Report message to the S-MN, including data volumes delivered to and received from the UE.
- For CHO with CPAC, RAN2 should refer to the measurement configuration of the source MCG or source SCG to decide CPAC execution conditions.
- The WID includes an objective related to specifying CHO configuration, including both a target MCG and target candidate SCGs for CPAC.
- In RAN2#119-e agreements were reached to support CHO including target MCG and target SCG, where the network provides one RRCReconfiguration message for each target CHO and CPC/CPA combination.
- Alternatively, A3/A5 events related to the PSCell could be supported for MN-initiated CPC.
- Proposal 6 discusses how to determine the applicable cells for the evaluation of Rel-18 CHO with CPAC, with Option 1 indicating that for the measId(s) indicated in condExecutionCondSCG, the applicable cell for evaluation is the candidate PSCell.
- Observation 1 notes that in Rel-18 CHO with CPC/CPA, the measIds associated with the same condReconfigId might need different applicable cells for evaluation.
- Proposal 5 suggests that RAN2 choose either reusing existing fields or creating new fields to configure CHO and CPC/CPA conditions for CHO with CPAC in Rel-18.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303414 (Apple) R2-2303607 (MediaTek Inc.) R2-2304025 (LG Electronics)

Technical differences among the TDocs include:

1. Mobility Performance:
- Option 1 provides worse mobility performance than the R17 scheme as delaying HO execution may cause MCG link failure and make UE connection broken.
- From the data interruption perspective, the mobility performance of Option 1 is not good.

2. SCG Failure:
- In Option 3, even though the target SCG is not selected based on radio quality, due to the default SCG state being deactivated, there will be no SCG failure.

3. Execution Command:
- The execution command in CHO cannot contain further conditional reconfiguration field.

4. Measurement Configuration:
- The execution condition of CHO with candidate SCG is based on the measurement configuration in current configuration.
- Proposal 2 suggests that the execution condition could be associated with more than one measurement ID, linked to candidate PCell and PSCell.

5. Simultaneous Evaluation:
- The UE starts to evaluate CPA/CPC simultaneously with CHO only if additional indication corresponding to each execution condition for CPA/CPC is configured.
- Proposal 1 suggests that new execution conditions for CPC should be considered to evaluate for potential PSCell change before CHO execution.
- Proposal 3 suggests that when an execution condition is met for CHO, the UE checks if the execution condition(s) for CPA/CPC is met to execute CHO and CPA/CPC simultaneously.

Examples from the TDocs:

- Option 1 provides worse mobility performance than the R17 scheme. [TDoc R2-2303414]
- In Option 3, there will be no SCG failure due to the default SCG state being deactivated. [TDoc R2-2303414]
- The execution command in CHO cannot contain further conditional reconfiguration field. [TDoc R2-2303607]
- The execution condition of CHO with candidate SCG is based on the measurement configuration in current configuration. [TDoc R2-2303607]
- Proposal 2 suggests that the execution condition could be associated with more than one measurement ID, linked to candidate PCell and PSCell. [TDoc R2-2303607]
- The UE starts to evaluate CPA/CPC simultaneously with CHO only if additional indication corresponding to each execution condition for CPA/CPC is configured. [TDoc R2-2304025]
- Proposal 1 suggests that new execution conditions for CPC should be considered to evaluate for potential PSCell change before CHO execution. [TDoc R2-2304025]
- Proposal 3 suggests that when an execution condition is met for CHO, the UE checks if the execution condition(s) for CPA/CPC is met to execute CHO and CPA/CPC simultaneously. [TDoc R2-2304025]









3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.5.1 : Organizational
Entity Concept 1: Work Plan for Rel-18 WI on XR Enhancements for NR [R2-2302715] Concept 2: SA2 Status for XR [R2-2302716] Concept 3: SA4 Status for XR [R2-2302717] Concept 4: Stage 2 Overview of XR Enhancements [R2-2302718] Concept 5: 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting #121bis Concept 6: Release 18 Concept 7: WID/SID: NR_XR_enh Concept 8: Document for: Discussion and Decision
Nokia, Qualcomm (Rapporteurs) Work plan, XR study, TR approved, WID updated [R2-2302715] Short overview, XR work, SA2 status [R2-2302716] Short overview, XR work, SA4 status [R2-2302717] Stage 2, XR enhancements, modified subclause 2, references [R2-2302718] 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting #121bis, Elbonia, 17-26 April 2023 Release 18, NR_XR_enh, NR_XR_enh-Core WID: NR_XR_enh, SID: NR_XR_enh-Core Discussion, decision, rapporteurs' contributions
Ericsson (RAN1 FL) Work plan collaboration, support for Rel-18, XR enhancements [R2-2302715] N/A N/A N/A 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting #121bis, Elbonia, 17-26 April 2023 Release 18, NR_XR_enh WID: NR_XR_enh Discussion, decision










3GPP-R2-121-bis-e    Agenda Item 7.5.2 : XR awareness
Entity XR Awareness UL/DL Periodicity Information PDU Set Handling UL Traffic Assistance UE-side Identifying PDU Sets UL Jitter Handling PDCP Duplication
Qualcomm Incorporated [R2-2302513] Discuss traffic assistance info from UE to network - - - - - -
Xiaomi Communications [R2-2302711] Discuss alternatives on mapping PDU sets onto QoS flows - - - - - -
Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell [R2-2302719] Discuss types of PDU Set and Data Burst information for UL - - - - - -
CATT [R2-2302756] Addresses RAN2 involvement in XR awareness - - - - - -
vivo [R2-2302810] Discuss enhancements for XR Awareness - - - - - -
ZTE Corporation, Sanechips [R2-2302850] Discuss how PDU Set related info is used in RAN for UL and DL - - - - - -
InterDigital [R2-2302895] Introduce UL PDU Set Importance - - - - - -
Intel Corporation [R2-2302909] Discuss RAN2 impacts for XR Awareness - - - - - -
Futurewei [R2-2302938] Discuss XR traffic assistance info from UE to network and usage of PDU Set QoS parameters - - - - - -
NEC [R2-2302950] Considerations on XR awareness, including traffic assistance info and use of PDU set info in RAN - - - - - -
KDDI Corporation [R2-2302996] Considerations on delay reporting and UL traffic arrival info - - - - - -
Sony [R2-2303081] Considerations on XR PDU prioritization - - - - - -
Sony [R2-2303082] Considerations on PSI and PSIHI details and handling in PDCP layer - - - - - -
TCL Communication [R2-2303124] Discuss XR awareness and service characteristics for each direction - - - - - -
Lenovo [R2-2303226] Discuss XR-awareness parameters to use in RAN - - - - - -
MediaTek Inc. [R2-2303301] Discuss need and UE impact of identifying PDU sets, Data bursts, and PSI, and assistance info provided by UE - - - - - -
OPPO [R2-2303312] Discuss XR awareness and XR traffic assistance information - - - - - -
Apple [R2-2303358] Views on Enhancements for XR-Awareness - - - - - -
Spreadtrum Communications [R2-2303578] Discuss XR awareness and signaling by CN of semi-static info per QoS flow - - - - - -
Huawei, HiSilicon [R2-2303595] Discuss UL assistance info for XR traffic - - - - - -
Ericsson [R2-2303719] Discuss RAN2 related objectives for XR awareness - - - - - -
Google Inc. [R2-2303741] On XR awareness, discuss enhancements related to power saving, and UL and DL traffic arrival info - - - - - -
NTT DOCOMO, INC. [R2-2303786] Discuss enhancements for XR awareness - - - - - -
CMCC [R2-2303800] Considerations on PDU sets and Traffic assistance information for XR - - - - - -
ASUSTeK [R2-2303930] Discuss PDU Set Information on UL for UE and whether PSI is sufficient for identifying UL PDU Set - - - - - -
Samsung [R2-2303986] Discuss UL jitter handling for XR traffic assistance information - - - - - -
LG Electronics Inc. [R2-2303998] Discuss PDCP duplication based on PDU set importance - - - - - -


TDoc comparison: R2-2302513 (Qualcomm Incorporated) R2-2302711 (Xiaomi Communications) R2-2302719 (Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell) R2-2302756 (CATT) R2-2302810 (vivo) R2-2302850 (ZTE Corporation, Sanechips) R2-2302909 (Intel Corporation) R2-2302938 (Futurewei) R2-2302950 (NEC) R2-2302996 (KDDI Corporation) R2-2303081 (Sony) R2-2303124 (TCL Communication) R2-2303226 (Lenovo) R2-2303301 (MediaTek Inc.)

• TDoc R2-2302513 highlights the importance of traffic periodicity and start offset of associated CG for reducing UL access latency. It also emphasizes the usefulness of network being aware of jitters in UL traffic for efficient CG configuration.

• TDoc R2-2302711 discusses the exclusion of XR-specific functionality in RLC bearer splitting and the difficulty of identifying UL traffic jitter in Rel-18 XR WI.

• TDoc R2-2302719 emphasizes the careful execution of PDCP discarding when PSER and PER are configured and the critical use of either PSDB or PDB in PDCP discarding, especially in UL.

• TDoc R2-2302756 highlights the need for UE assistance information associated with PSER requirement and the configurability captured in TR.

• TDoc R2-2302810 proposes the provision of DL PDU set importance, UL traffic arrival information, start time of the first PDU, and PSER to RAN3 specification.

• TDoc R2-2302850 discusses the usefulness of UL jitter awareness for CG configuration and scheduling and proposes the usage of PDU Set information in GTP header in DL handling of PDU sets.

• TDoc R2-2302909 proposes the provision of UL traffic jitter information associated with each periodicity of QoS flow and the observation that dynamic information for UL is not needed to provide to network.

• TDoc R2-2302938 discusses the transmitter's choice of not transmitting PDUs of certain PDU sets for congestion control and the need for conveying the End of Data Burst indication to the gNB.

• TDoc R2-2302950 proposes the provision of UL traffic jitter information by CN to RAN and the observation that UL traffic jitter information is missed compared to DL.

• TDoc R2-2302996 proposes the use of delay for UL traffic arrival information and UL jitter and the need to clarify the position of FEC redundancy bits.

• TDoc R2-2303124 proposes the provision of static or semi-static UL XR traffic information, such as periodicity, traffic jitter information, and start time, for gNB scheduling.

• TDoc R2-2303226 discusses the need to provide PDU set QoS parameter and DRB characteristics to DU via control plane signaling and PDU set information of DRB to DU via GTP-U extension header for scheduling.

• TDoc R2-2303301 proposes the provision of traffic generated size and latest expected traffic arrival time for appropriate configuration of WI objective and efficient CG configuration.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303082 (Sony) R2-2303578 (Spreadtrum Communications) R2-2303595 (Huawei, HiSilicon) R2-2303800 (CMCC)

• Segmentation and multiplexing of data in lower layers may make certain PDU segments untraceable.
• UL traffic arrival information could be statistically represented and semi-static.
• In-sequence delivery may not be useful for XR type applications and waiting for a packet may cause delays.
• During congestion, high priority PDU sets should be allowed to jump the queue and transmitted first.
• PSIHI may discard all packets related to a PDU set if all PDUs are needed and some are lost.
• UE can use UAI to inform gNB of traffic assistance information.
• PDU Set status indication should be triggered if loss of PDU occurs.
• PSDB defines the upper bound for the delay that a PDU Set may experience during transfer.
• Inter-layer signaling interaction between RLC entity and PDCP entity may be complex for PSER counting implementation.
• No need to provide additional assistance information from UE to gNB on top of traffic arrival time and jitter information.
• UL jitter information is useful for adjusting scheduling and in-band marking may not be necessary.
• PDU sets with different PSI values may have different timers, and PSDB is the primary parameter for discard during congestion.
• XRM service PDUs with dependencies should be transmitted first.
• PDU Set handling can affect XR experience and radio resource management efficiency.

Example snippets from TDoc to support the highlighted differences:
• "It is clear that segments of a PDU set may not be traceable on lower layers due to e.g., segmentation in RLC and HARQ and then multiplexing of data in MAC sub-layer."
• "Proposition 1: UAI can be used by UE to inform gNB of the traffic assistance information, including periodicity and jitter info."
• "From our side, once the receiver finds that the loss of PDU of the PDU Set happened, the PDU Set status indication should be triggered to help the sender know which PDU Set is unsuccessfully received."
• "PSDB defines the upper bound for the delay that a PDU Set may experience for the transfer between the UE and the N6 termination point at the UPF."
• "Compared with the option 1, the option 2 needs more inter-layer signaling interaction between RLC entity and PDCP entity, which is complex for PSER counting implementation."
• "Observation 1: UL jitter information is useful for the gNB to adjust its scheduling accordingly, e.g. place the CG resource properly or utilize dynamic scheduling in the presence of high jitter."
• "Proposal 2: To support the usage of PSI in case of congestion, the PDU set with different PSI even with same QoS value will be set with different timers, and PSDB is the primary parameter for discard."
• "Mode 1: The XRM service PDUs have dependency with each other, where the PDUs (e.g. I frame), on which are dependent by the other PDUs (e.g. P frame, B frame), are expected to be more important and should be transmitted firstly."
• "The new information associated with PDU-Set can facilitate the PDU Set integrated packet handling and Differentiated PDU Set handling, which can affect XR experience and radio resource management efficiency."

TDoc comparison: R2-2302895 (InterDigital) R2-2303741 (Google Inc.) R2-2303930 (ASUSTeK) R2-2303986 (Samsung)

TDoc R2-2302895:
- Semi-static uplink traffic parameters useful to the RAN include periodicity of traffic for scheduling.
- Dynamic uplink traffic parameters useful to the UE include PSI and a subset of PDU set identification parameters.
- PDU set importance (PSI) is useful in the discard mechanism at PDCP in the presence of congestion.
- SDAP should have visibility of PDU set QoS parameters.

TDoc R2-2303741:
- UE can signal statistics about Data Burst sizes to allocate the right amount of UL resources.
- UE can indicate periodicity for each traffic flow, including UL AR traffic and UL pose/control information.
- UE can signal information about arrival time for traffic with jitter, such as UL AR traffic.
- UE can update the network about any changes in periodicities via RRC.

TDoc R2-2303930:
- All PDUs of a PDU Set for carrying one application data unit (i.e. video frame) are associated with the same timestamp.
- Different PDU Sets are associated with different timestamps.
- Clock frequency is dependent on format of data carried as payload and is specified statically or dynamically.
- Sampling instant must be derived from a clock that increments monotonically and linearly in time.

TDoc R2-2303986:
- Signalling procedure for UL jitter follows non-3GPP delay budget request procedure between UE and 5GC for Personal IoT Network (PIN).
- Non-3GPP delay budget received from the PIN Element with Gateway Capability (PEGC) in PIN can be utilized to present UL jitter in non-3GPP based tethering usage.
- UE can use UE requested PDU Session Establishment/modification procedure for non-3GPP delay budget request.

TDoc comparison: R2-2303312 (OPPO) R2-2303358 (Apple) R2-2303719 (Ericsson) R2-2303998 (LG Electronics Inc.)

The following are the technical differences among the TDocs:

1. Different ways of identifying PDU sets: The UE AS layer can use PSI to differentiate PDU set types and perform corresponding PDCP operations. Alternatively, the boundary between PDU sets can be used to identify their association. (TDoc R2-2303312)

2. Configuring CG for UL transmission: gNB may configure or re-configure CG for UL transmission based on received UAI. (TDoc R2-2303358)

3. Two options for determining XR Traffic Assistance Information: The UE can report XR Traffic Assistance Information based on input from the application and/or tethering module following an internal handshake, or detection or arrival times in the UE's AS itself. (TDoc R2-2303358)

4. No need for in-band marking of PDUs over Uu: The UE needs to identify PDU set and data bursts dynamically, including PSI, but in-band marking over Uu of PDUs is not needed. (TDoc R2-2303719)

5. DL Assistance information for optimized configuration of existing features: DL Assistance information can be used for optimized configuration of existing features such as scheduling, DRX, and sleep mode activation. (TDoc R2-2303719)

6. QoS requirements for optimized configuration of features: PSDB, PSER, and PSIHI are QoS requirements that gNB aims to fulfill and can also be used for optimized configuration of features. (TDoc R2-2303719, TDoc R2-2303998)

7. Selective PDCP duplication for reliable transmission of PDU sets with high importance: PDCP entity can selectively duplicate PDCP PDUs associated with PDU set with high importance to ensure reliable transmission. (TDoc R2-2303998)

Example snippets from the original TDocs:

- "For the uplink, RAN2 discusses whether to support selective PDCP duplication, i.e. the transmitting PDCP entity performs packet-level PDCP duplication based on PSI in the case that the selective PDCP duplication is configured by the network." (TDoc R2-2303312)
- "Based on the received UAI, the gNB may conduct scheduling accordingly (e.g., configure or re-configure CG for UL transmission, if deemed appropriate by the gNB scheduler)" (TDoc R2-2303358)
- "XR Traffic Assistance Information could be determined and reported according to on one of the following two options: 1) Input from the application and/or tethering module following an internal handshake; or 2) Detection or arrival times in the UE’s AS itself." (TDoc R2-2303358)
- "the UE needs to be able to identify PDU Set and Data Bursts dynamically, including PSI, but in-band marking over Uu of PDUs is not needed." (TDoc R2-2303719)
- "PSDB, PSER and PSIHI are QoS requirements that gNB aims to fulfil and can also be used for optimized configuration of features." (TDoc R2-2303719, TDoc R2-2303998)
- "In order to ensure reliable transmission of the PDU set with high importance within a DRB, the PDCP entity selectively duplicates the PDCP PDUs associated with PDU set with the high importance." (TDoc R2-2303998)